diff options
Diffstat (limited to '43876-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 43876-0.txt | 7649 |
1 files changed, 7649 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/43876-0.txt b/43876-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0454ef2 --- /dev/null +++ b/43876-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7649 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43876 *** + +CALIFORNIA ATHABASCAN +GROUPS + +BY + +MARTIN A. BAUMHOFF + + +ANTHROPOLOGICAL RECORDS + +Vol. 16, No. 5 + +UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS + +ANTHROPOLOGICAL RECORDS + +Editors (Berkeley): J. H. Rowe, R. F. Heizer, R. F. Murphy, E. Norbeck +Volume 16, No. 5, pp. 157-238, plates 9-11, 2 figures in text, 18 maps + +Submitted by editors May 6, 1957 +Issued August 1, 1958 +Price, $1.50 + +University of California Press +Berkeley and Los Angeles +California + +Cambridge University Press +London, England + +Manufactured in the United States of America + + + + +PREFACE + + +In March, 1950, the University of California assumed custodianship of +an extensive collection of original and secondary data referring to +California Indian ethnology, made by Dr. C. Hart Merriam and originally +deposited with the Smithsonian Institution. Since that time the Merriam +collection has been consulted by qualified persons interested in +linguistics, ethnogeography, and other specialized subjects. Some of +the data have been published, the most substantial publication being a +book, Studies of California Indians (1955), which comprises essays and +original records written or collected by Dr. Merriam. + +The selection and editing of the material for the Studies volume made +us aware of the extent of the detailed information on ethnogeography +which a thorough survey of the Merriam data would provide. We therefore +approached Dr. Leonard Carmichael, Secretary of the Smithsonian +Institution, with the proposal that a qualified graduate student be +appointed as research assistant to study and prepare for publication +a discrete amount of Merriam record material, remuneration for this +work to be paid from the E. H. Harriman fund, administered by the +Smithsonian Institution for preparation and publication of Dr. Merriam's +ethnological data. This proposal was approved, and Mr. Martin Baumhoff +began his one year of investigation on September 15, 1955. + +After discussion, we agreed that the area where tribal distributions, +village locations, and aboriginal population numbers were least +certainly known--and also a field where the Merriam data were fairly +abundant--was the territory of the several Athabascan tribes of +Northwestern California. Under our direction, Baumhoff patiently +assembled all the available material on these tribes, producing what is +certainly the most definitive study yet made of their distribution and +numbers. + +In this monograph the importance of the Merriam data is central, +although they are compounded with information collected by other +students of the California Athabascans. We believe that the maps showing +group distribution represent the closest possible approximation to the +aboriginal situation that can now be arrived at. + +The Department of Anthropology hopes to be able to continue the work of +studying and publishing the Merriam data on tribal distributions. It +takes this opportunity to express its appreciation of the coöperation of +the Smithsonian Institution in this undertaking. + + A. L. Kroeber + + R. F. Heizer + + + + +CONTENTS + + + Page + + Preface iii + + Introduction 157 + Athabascan culture 158 + + Athabascan boundaries 160 + Exterior boundaries 160 + Interior boundaries 161 + + Groups 166 + Kato 166 + Wailaki 167 + Pitch Wailaki 176 + Lassik 178 + Nongatl 181 + Sinkyone 184 + Mattole 195 + Bear River 200 + Whilkut 201 + Hupa 209 + + Population 216 + Sources 216 + Estimates based on village counts 216 + Estimates based on fish resources 218 + Gross estimate 220 + + Appendixes + I. The Tolowa: Data from Notes of C. Hart Merriam 225 + II. Notes of Upper Eel River Indians, by A. L. Kroeber 227 + + Bibliography 230 + + Plates 233 + + +MAPS + + 1. Athabascan Boundaries--Kroeber vs. Baumhoff 162 + 2. Athabascan Boundaries--Baumhoff 162 + 3. Athabascan Boundaries--Merriam vs. Baumhoff 163 + 4. Athabascan Boundaries--Various authors vs. Baumhoff 163 + 5. Villages and Tribelets of the Eel Wailaki and the North Fork + Wailaki 168 + 6. Villages and Tribelets of the Pitch Wailaki 177 + 7. Presumed Nongatl Villages in the Bridgeville Region 180 + 8. Lassik Villages in the Alder Point Region 180 + 9. Nongatl Villages on Yager Creek 182 + 10. Nongatl Villages in the Blocksburg Region 182 + 11. Villages of the Lolangkok Sinkyone 186 + 12. Villages of the Shelter Cove Sinkyone 190 + 13. Place Names of the Lolangkok Sinkyone 192 + 14. Villages and Tribelets of the Mattole 197 + 15. Villages of the Chilula Whilkut, + North Fork Whilkut, and Kloki Whilkut 204 + 16. Villages of the Mad River + Whilkut, the South Fork Hupa, and Kloki Whilkut 208 + 17. Villages of the Hupa and South Fork Hupa 211 + 18. Yuki "Tribes," according to Eben Tillotson (App. II) 228 + +CALIFORNIA ATHABASCAN +GROUPS + +BY + +MARTIN A. BAUMHOFF + + + + +INTRODUCTION + +In 1910 C. Hart Merriam, already well known as a naturalist, came to +California and began the study of California ethnography which was to +occupy him for the rest of his life. Almost every year from then until +his death in 1942 Merriam spent about six months in the field, talking +to Indians and recording their memories of aboriginal times. All this +field work resulted in an immense collection of data on the California +Indians, most of which has never been published (see Merriam's +bibliography in Merriam, 1955, pp. 227-229). + +In 1950 the greater part of Merriam's field notes was deposited at the +University of California, with the intention of making them available +for study and publication. One volume of papers has already appeared +(Merriam, 1955), and the present study is part of a continuing program. + +The California Athabascans were selected as the first group for study at +the suggestion of A. L. Kroeber, the reason being that the Athabascans +have been and still remain one of the least known aboriginal groups +in the State. This is not because they were conquered early and their +culture dissipated, as is true of the Mission Indians; there were +scarcely any whites in the California Athabascan area before the 1850's. +Indeed, as late as the 1920's and '30's there were many good Athabascan +informants still available. The reason for the hiatus in our knowledge +lies in an accident in the history of ethnology rather than in the +history of California. + +The early work among the California Athabascans was done by Pliny Earle +Goddard. Goddard began his studies of the Athabascans in 1897 at the +Hoopa Indian Reservation, where he was a lay missionary. He stayed +there until 1900, when he went to Berkeley to work for his doctorate +in linguistics under Benjamin Ide Wheeler, President of the University +of California. Between 1900 and 1909 Goddard was associated with the +University as student and professor and during this time he visited the +Athabascans periodically, until he had worked with virtually all the +groups considered in this paper. + +During this same period A. L. Kroeber was engaged in gathering material +for his classic Handbook of California Indians. Because of the scarcity +of ethnographers in those years Kroeber could not afford the time to +work in the Athabascan area and duplicate Goddard's investigations. +Kroeber did study the Hupa and the Kato at either end of the Athabascan +area but, except for a hurried trip through the region in 1902, he +did not work with the other groups, and the responsibility for the +ethnographic field work therefore devolved upon Goddard. + +Goddard, however, was not primarily an ethnographer but a linguist, +and he directed his chief efforts toward linguistic investigations. He +has published an impressive body of Athabascan texts and linguistic +analyses but, except for his Life and Culture of the Hupa (1903_a_), +almost nothing on the culture of the Athabascans. + +The net result is that the California Athabascans are virtually unknown, +and Merriam's fresh data provide an opportunity to piece together the +available evidence. + +The Merriam files, deposited at the Department of Anthropology of the +University of California, contain information on each of the tribes of +California, some of it being information gathered by Merriam himself, +the rest clippings and quotations from various historic and ethnographic +sources. The primary and secondary materials are easily distinguished, +since Merriam gave scrupulous citations to his sources. + +Merriam's own data consist of word lists, ethnogeographical material, +and random notes on various aspects of native culture. I have not used +his word lists, since their usefulness is primarily linguistic and I am +not competent to perform the necessary linguistic analysis, but all the +random ethnographic notes which he recorded for the Athabascan groups +are here included under the discussion of the appropriate tribes. + +Most of the Merriam Athabascan material is geographic, consisting +of lists of villages and place names, of descriptions and lengthy +discussions of tribal boundaries. Obviously Merriam attempted to +gather a complete file of this sort of information, and he was largely +successful. His work provides a good basis for establishing boundaries +and for locating tribelets and villages. + +Another important source of information, serving the same purpose, is +the Goddard material. Evidently Goddard very much enjoyed the long +horseback trips he made with an informant, who could point out the +village sites, landmarks, and other points of interest of his native +territory. This information, carefully recorded by Goddard, has proved +extremely valuable in the present work, the more so since it represents +firsthand observation. + +Goddard's ethnogeographic work for three of the California Athabascan +groups has already been published (1914_a_; 1923_a_; 1924). Besides +this, the present writer has been fortunate enough to have access to +Goddard's unpublished notes, which contain information on several +hundred additional villages in the area. These notes were in the +possession of Dr. Elsie Clews Parsons, Goddard's literary executor, +and on her death they were sent to the University of California by +Dr. Gladys Reichard. They remained in the files of the University of +California Museum of Anthropology until their use in the present work. + +This unpublished material of Goddard's consists of a group of file +cards, on each of which is typed the name, location, and any other +pertinent data for a single village. Some of the lists are accompanied +by maps, showing precise location of the villages. In the lists for +which there are no maps but only verbal descriptions of the sites, +the township, range, and quarter section coördinates are given. The +township and range coördinates have been changed since Goddard's time, +in accordance with the more accurate surveys of the last thirty years, +but county maps of the appropriate period provide a perfectly adequate +way of locating Goddard's sites within a few hundred yards. + +It is clear, on the basis of internal evidence, that there is or was +more Goddard material than is now accessible to the present author. For +the Kato, for instance, Goddard says that he recorded more than fifty +villages (Goddard, 1909, p. 67); all that remain in his notes are two +village cards numbered 51 and 52 respectively. There may also be some +data, once recorded but now lost, from the Lassik, Nongatl, and Shelter +Cove Sinkyone. I have communicated with the American Museum of Natural +History, where Goddard was a member of the staff, and with Indiana +University, where some of his manuscripts are deposited, but neither of +these institutions has any knowledge of the material in question. + +The Merriam and Goddard material, taken together, provides a fair amount +of information on the geography of the California Athabascan groups. We +are now in the position of knowing a great deal about the location of +the tribes, tribelets, and villages of these people, while we know very +little about their way of life, except what can be gained by inference +from the surrounding groups. + +The author's thanks are due to Dr. A. L. Kroeber and Dr. R. F. Heizer, +who gave their full coöperation throughout the preparation of the +present paper. Dr. Henry Sheffé was kind enough to advise on the +statistics used in the section on population. + + +ATHABASCAN CULTURE + +The following sketch of Athabascan culture attempts to provide some +background for the later discussion of the various groups. In this +sketch I have not used the material from the Hupa, since they are +virtually identical with the Yurok and not at all typical of the more +southern Athabascans. + +_Subsistence._--For information on Athabascan economy I have relied +heavily on Essene's account of the Lassik (1942, p. 84). There was, no +doubt, variation among the different groups, but for the most part, they +must have followed a similar pattern. + +The most difficult time in the annual cycle of food production was +winter. There were then few fish and almost no game animals or crops for +gathering. From late November to early March people had to rely on food +that had been stored the previous year. Essene's informant said that +about every four or five years there would be a hard winter, but she +could remember only one when people actually starved to death. + +In February or March the spring salmon run began, and after that the +danger of starvation was past. At about this time the grass began to +grow again, and the first clover was eaten ravenously because of the +dearth of greens during the winter. + +The herb-gathering and salmon-fishing activity lasted until the spring +rains ended in April or May, when the people left their villages on the +salmon streams and scattered out into the hills for the summer. Usually +only a few families would stay together during the summer, while the men +hunted deer, squirrels, and other animals and the women gathered clover, +seeds, roots, and nuts. Food was most plentiful at this season, and +the places visited varied with the abundance of different crops. If a +certain crop was good, the Indians would spend more time that summer in +the area where the crop grew best. The next year they might go somewhere +else. The vegetation of the Athabascan habitat is not well enough mapped +to permit a precise delineation of these various summer camping grounds. + +In September or October, when the acorns were ripe, the Indians would +return to their winter villages and smoke meat for storing and probably +store the acorns. Each family built a new house to protect it from the +heavy winter rains. After the first rain in the fall the salmon run +again in some of the streams of the region and were caught and smoked +for winter storage. + +It is evident that the crucial factor in the economy was the amount +of food stored for winter and that this food supply was a controlling +influence on the size of the population, since, in bad years, people +starved. At least, this was so for the Lassik, and it was no doubt true +among the other groups as well. Salmon, meat, and acorns were doubtless +the chief foods stored, and thus population size would have responded +quite sensitively to the quantity and condition of the salmon, deer, and +oak trees. + +_Social organization._--For social organization I have had to rely +mostly on Nomland's accounts of the Sinkyone and Bear River groups +(1935, 1938). The primary social unit among the California Athabascans +was the simple family, including a man, his wife, and his children. +Although polygyny was known, at least among some groups, it was rare, +and the possessor of two wives was reckoned a rich man. Most marriage +was by purchase; the levirate and sororate were common. Divorce was also +common and might be obtained by a man because of his wife's barrenness, +laziness, or infidelity. + +The next social group, larger than the family, was the tribelet. Kroeber +(1932, p. 258) has defined the tribelet as follows. + + Each of these [tribelets] seemed to possess a small territory + usually definable in terms of drainage; a principal town or + settlement, often with a chief recognized by the whole group; + normally, minor settlements which might or might not be occupied + permanently; and sometimes a specific name, but more often none + other than the designation of the principal town. Each group acted + as a homogeneous unit in matters of land ownership, trespass, war, + major ceremonies, and the entertainment entailed by them. + +This definition, given for the Pomo, fits the Athabascan area very well. +Merriam usually refers to these groups as "bands," while Goddard calls +them "subtribes." In the body of this paper I use the word "band" when +quoting or paraphrasing Merriam, otherwise I call them "tribelets." + +The tribelet was the largest corporate group in the area. A +larger group, which I call the tribe, has been identified by most +ethnographers. This latter group ordinarily had no corporate +functions, unless it happened to be coterminous with, and therefore +indistinguishable from, the tribelet. The tribe, as the term is used +here, was a group of two or more tribelets--or occasionally one single +group--with a single speech dialect, different from that of their +neighbors. The tribe was also culturally uniform, but not necessarily +distinct from its neighbors in this respect. The similarity between +people of a single tribe evidently gave them a feeling of community but +had no further effect on their social or political organization. + +The following tribes have been identified in the Athabascan area, each +including several tribelets, except for the Bear River tribe, which +consists of one single tribelet. + + Kato: The Kato probably included at least 2 tribelets, but we + have no information on this point. + + Eel River Wailaki: 9 tribelets. + + North Fork Wailaki: 6 tribelets. + + Pitch Wailaki: 4 tribelets. + + Lassik: Probably several tribelets, but there is no + information. + + Nongatl: There is evidence of 6 subgroups of the Nongatl. Some + of these may be dialect divisions, that is, tribes. The information + is not sufficient to permit definition and they have therefore been + grouped under Nongatl. The extent of Nongatl territory indicates + that there must have been several tribelets. + + Lolangkok Sinkyone: There were at least 2, and possibly more, + tribelets. + + Shelter Cove Sinkyone: There were at least 4 tribelets. + + Mattole: 2 tribelets. + + Bear River: The Bear River tribe consists of a single tribelet. + + Whilkut: The 4 subdivisions of the Whilkut--Chilula Whilkut, + Kloki Whilkut, Mad River Whilkut, and North Fork Whilkut--all + appear to be tribelets. It is possible that the Mad River Whilkut + spoke a different dialect than the other groups and, if so, they + should be given tribal status. The evidence is not clear on this + point and I have therefore included them simply as a Whilkut + tribelet. + + Hupa: 2 tribelets are to be distinguished for the Hupa + proper. In addition, Merriam distinguishes the South Fork Hupa + as a distinct dialect division. The linguistic separation is not + supported by Goddard or Kroeber and I have therefore included the + South Fork Hupa under the Hupa proper, but as a separate tribelet. + This gives a total of 3 tribelets for the Hupa. + +In general, it may be stated that the California Athabascans did not +have the strong local organization characteristic of Central California. +Emphasis on wealth, although present, was less strongly developed than +among the Yurok and therefore did not lead to the fragmented villages +and tight family organization of that group. This statement, of course, +does not apply to the Hupa, and probably not to the Whilkut, both of +which were more like the Yurok. + +_Religion and the supernatural._--The clearest account of the religious +practices of the Athabascans is given by Nomland (1938, pp. 93-98), +who obtained her information from the Bear River woman, Nora Coonskin, +herself a shaman. The account, however, may not be representative of the +Athabascans as a whole. + +The Athabascans thought that each person had a spirit which, leaving him +when he died, might come back to earth as a small creature about two +feet high. This returned spirit could communicate with shamans. When a +person had a fainting spell, the spirit departed from the body and a +shaman had to be called in order to get the patient's spirit back. If +the shaman failed, the patient died. Shamans' spirits went to a special +afterworld and were accompanied only by the spirits of other shamans. + +Shamans were important among the Bear River people and probably among +the other Athabascans as well. They might be either men or women; most +often they were women, men being thought less powerful. The first +signs of a shaman's power came in childhood, the visible signs being, +for example, excessive drooling in sleep. If the childhood omens were +proper, the training began about the age of twelve, under the direction +of an older shaman, the main ceremony being a series of dances performed +on five successive nights. Other ceremonies followed; then the girl +was a full-fledged shaman. She was not supposed to use her power for a +period of two to five years or it would harm her. The fee for training +the initiate was large, 200 to 300 dollars in Indian money (perhaps a +6-8 ft. string of dentalia shells). + +There were two types of shamans--curing shamans and sucking shamans. The +curing shaman sang and danced for two nights while her spirit searched +for the spirit of the patient. A shaman's fee was from five to ten +dollars per night; if the patient died within two months, the fee had to +be returned. + +The sucking shamans could suck out pains which were causing illness. +These shamans were paid more because they were more powerful; having +greater power, they were in greater danger and had a shorter life +expectancy. + +_Connections with other groups._--The foregoing account of economy, +social organization, and religious practices does not by any means make +up a complete picture of Athabascan life, but it illustrates certain +salient factors. In particular, the connections with Northwestern +California are clear. So far as influence from Northwestern California +is concerned the Athabascans may be divided into three groups: the +Hupa and Whilkut on the north are an integral part of the northwestern +culture center; the Wailaki and Kato on the south are essentially +Central Californian; and the groups in between are transitional, but +more northern than southern in their outlook. + + + + +ATHABASCAN BOUNDARIES + + +In evaluating boundaries I have relied most heavily on the information +of Merriam (map 3) and Kroeber (map 1). Merriam's data are contained in +a 1:500,000 map of California, together with a descriptive text. The +map and the description were made up by Dr. Merriam's daughter, Mrs. +Zenaida Merriam Talbot, during the years 1939 to 1946, from information +in Merriam's notes and journals, the latter of which are not accessible +to this writer. Often, where Merriam's boundaries disagree with those of +Kroeber or other authors, Merriam's line will follow a stream, whereas +the alternative follows a ridge or drainage diversion. When the evidence +is inconclusive, I have usually followed Kroeber's method and chosen the +ridge rather than the stream as the boundary. In this area the streams +are small and easily crossed during most of the year and therefore would +not constitute a barrier sufficient for the divergence of dialects. On +the other hand, the hills were visited only briefly for hunting and +gathering; the population depended to a great extent on the products of +streams for its subsistence, and consequently all the permanent villages +were in the lowlands and canyons. For this reason, the ridges rather +than the streams would tend to be boundaries. Kroeber has discussed this +point more generally (1939, p. 216) and also in greater detail (1925_a_, +p. 160). + + +EXTERIOR BOUNDARIES + +The southern boundary of the Athabascans begins at Usal Creek on the +coast and goes eastward for a few miles before swinging south to include +the drainages of Hollow Tree Creek and the South Fork of the Eel in +Kato territory. It turns north to enclose the headwaters of South Fork +and proceeds along the ridge dividing Ten Mile Creek from the main Eel +until it reaches the drainage of Blue Rock Creek; it then passes around +north of the creek and crosses the Eel near the mouth of the creek. From +this point it runs in an easterly direction around the drainage of Hulls +Creek. + +Kroeber's map in the Handbook shows the southern boundary beginning a +few miles south of Usal Creek, but Merriam and Nomland both maintain +that the creek itself is the boundary and Gifford (1939, p. 304) says +that both Sinkyone and Yuki were spoken in the village situated at the +mouth of the creek. The information of all four authors came from either +Sally or Tom Bell, wife and husband, who are respectively Shelter Cove +Sinkyone and Coast Yuki. I have accepted Merriam's boundary, since it +agrees with Nomland's. + +Merriam maintains that the western boundary of the Kato runs along the +South Fork of the Eel and he is partly supported in this by Barrett +(1908, map), whose boundary includes the drainage of South Fork but +not the drainage of Hollow Tree Creek. Barrett, however, disavows +any certainty on this particular boundary. Kroeber's line, which +does include the drainage of Hollow Tree Creek in Kato territory, is +supported by a specific statement from Gifford (1939, p. 296) that +"Hollow Tree Creek did not belong to the Coast Yuki although they fished +there." I have therefore accepted Kroeber's version. + +All authorities agree on the southern and eastern boundaries of the +Kato as far north as the drainage of Blue Rock Creek. Merriam claims +this drainage for the Wailaki, whereas both Kroeber and Foster claim it +for the ta'no'm tribelet of the Yuki. It is evident that this territory +was disputed, for it was the scene of several of the wars involving the +Wailaki, the Kato, and the Yuki (Kroeber, 1925_a_, p. 165; 1925_b_). +Kroeber obtained a detailed list of place names in this area from a +ta'no'm Yuki, whereas Merriam's Wailaki information is only of a most +general nature. For this reason I have given the territory to the Yuki. + +All the authorities, except Foster, agree on the rest of the southern +boundary of the Athabascans. Foster has the Yuki-Wailaki line cross +Hulls Creek about five miles from its mouth instead of passing south of +its drainage. Both Kroeber and Merriam favor the more southern line, and +Goddard (1924, p. 224) says that the Wailaki claimed a fishing spot in +the disputed area, so I have accepted this version. + +The eastern boundary of the Athabascans runs north along the ridge +separating the drainages of the North Fork and Middle Fork of the Eel +until it reaches the headwaters of the Mad River. Thence it runs in a +northern direction along the ridge that separates the drainage of the +Mad River from that of the South Fork of the Trinity until it reaches +Grouse Creek, where it turns eastward to cross the South Fork of the +Trinity at the mouth of the creek. It continues north on the east side +of South Fork, following the crest until it crosses the main Trinity +about five miles above its confluence with South Fork, and then follows +around the headwaters of Horse Linto Creek and Mill Creek. + +Merriam's eastern Athabascan boundary conflicts with the one drawn by +Kroeber, Foster, and Goddard in assigning the northern part of the +drainage of the Middle Fork of the Eel to the Pitch Wailaki instead of +to the Yuki. Merriam is almost certainly wrong here, for Goddard (1924) +definitely does not include this area within Wailaki territory and his +information in this region appears to have been especially reliable. +Moreover, Merriam got his information from natives of the main Eel +River, who were evidently not on good terms with their relatives to the +east and knew little about them. I have therefore accepted the Kroeber +boundary. + +The next conflict is to the north of this, where Kroeber's boundary +runs up the ridge separating the Mad River from the South Fork of the +Trinity, whereas Merriam's runs along South Fork itself in the twenty +miles from Yolla Bolly Mountain northwest to Ruth. Essene (1942) agrees +with Merriam on this point, but his data add nothing to the argument, +since he worked with the same Lassik informant as Merriam. I have +accepted Kroeber's version because it is corroborated by both Goddard +(1907) and Du Bois (1935, map 1), who agree in assigning the valley of +the South Fork of the Trinity to the Wintun. + +Kroeber and Merriam agree on the line running north of Ruth as far as +a point about fifteen miles south of Grouse Creek, where Merriam's +line drifts westward to follow the north-south channel of Grouse Creek +for a short distance, whereas Kroeber's line follows due north along +the drainage pattern. Essene supports Kroeber, but his informant did +not come from this region so her testimony perhaps cannot be relied on +heavily. I have accepted Kroeber's line because it follows the drainage +pattern. + +Kroeber's boundary also conflicts with Merriam's on the east side of +South Fork. Kroeber's line runs along the ridge separating South Fork +from the main Trinity whereas Merriam's runs along the Trinity itself. +The testimony of Dixon on the Chimariko (1910, pp. 295-296) supports +Kroeber, so I have accepted the latter's line. + +The northern boundary of the Athabascans runs west, parallel to Mill +Creek, crossing the Trinity a few miles south of its confluence with +the Klamath, and then continues west until it reaches Bald Hills Ridge, +which separates Redwood Creek drainage from Klamath River drainage. It +continues north along this ridge and then turns east to cross Redwood +Creek about ten miles southeast of Orick. + +Goddard (1914_a_, pl. 38) indicates three Athabascan summer camps on the +Yurok side of the dividing ridge. This may mean that some Athabascan +territory was included in the Klamath drainage, but if so, it would +contradict the testimony of the Yurok (Kroeber, 1925_a_, fig. 1; +Waterman, 1920, map 2). However, the land away from the Klamath was +little used by the Yurok (Kroeber, 1925_a_, p. 8), so it may be that +this territory was claimed by both groups. I have accepted Kroeber's +boundary here. Otherwise there are no conflicts on the northern boundary. + +The western boundary of the Athabascans runs due south from Redwood +Creek, following the 124th Meridian, crossing the North Fork of the Mad +River at Blue Lake and crossing the main Mad River a few miles above +the mouth of North Fork. From here the line follows south around the +drainage of Humboldt Bay until it crosses the Eel River at the mouth +of the Van Duzen, whence it runs south to Bear River Ridge, which it +follows west to the ocean. + +A major conflict in the western boundary of the Athabascans involves +the drainage of the North Fork of the Mad River. Kroeber and Loud +both assign this area to the Wiyot, whereas Merriam assigns it to the +Athabascans. Neither Kroeber nor Loud gives specific data in support of +his contention; thus Merriam's specific local information quoted below, +renders his line preferable. + + Sunday, August 11, 1918.... I found two old men of the + same tribe, who were born and reared at the Blue Lake rancheria + 'Ko-tin-net--the westernmost village of the Ha-whil-kut-ka tribe. + +I have therefore accepted Merriam's boundary. + +From the Mad River south to the Eel there is general agreement except +that, as usual, Merriam's lines tend to follow the streams, whereas +those of Kroeber and Loud follow the ridges. Another conflict comes +at the crossing of the Eel River. Curtis (1924, 13:67) says the line +crosses at the mouth of the Van Duzen. Nomland (1938, map 1), Loud, +and Merriam all agree with this. Powers (1877, p. 101) and Kroeber +both locate the line a few miles up the river from this point at Eagle +Prairie, while Nomland's Wiyot informant (Nomland and Kroeber, 1936, map +1) places the line even farther south at the mouth of Larabee Creek. The +weight of evidence indicates that the line was probably near the mouth +of the Van Duzen; Goddard (1929, p. 292) states that there was a Bear +River village near there. + +There is also some disagreement on the northern boundary of the Bear +River group. Nomland says that it is at Fleener Creek, about five miles +north of Bear River Ridge, whereas Kroeber indicates a line about two +miles north of Bear River Ridge. Loud, Merriam, and Goddard, on the +other hand, all indicate that the boundary is Bear River Ridge itself. +Nomland's boundary is almost certainly in error, since Loud gives Wiyot +villages occurring south of that line. Most of the evidence points to +Bear River Ridge as the line, and this version has been accepted. + + +INTERIOR BOUNDARIES + +There is no disagreement on the western boundary of the Hupa. It +runs north and south along Bald Hills Ridge, dividing the drainages +of Redwood Creek and the Trinity River. Merriam gives the Hupa +two divisions--the Tin-nung-hen-na-o, or Hupa proper, and the +Ts´[)a]-nung-wh[)a], or Southern Hupa. The line dividing these two +groups lies just north of the main Trinity to the east of South Fork and +along Madden Creek to the west of South Fork. Kroeber (1925_a_, p. 129) +and Goddard (1903_a_, p. 7) do not give any support for a linguistic +division, as indicated by Merriam, but there does seem to have been some +cultural difference. + +In the division of the territory west of the Hupa Merriam differs +radically from Kroeber and Goddard, although all three scholars divide +the area between two groups. Kroeber and Goddard call the northernmost +group Chilula, an anglicization of the Yurok word tsulu-la meaning "Bald +Hills people," and the southern, Whilkut, from the Hupa word hoilkut-hoi +meaning "Redwood Creek people" or "upper Redwood Creek people." + +Merriam calls the first of his two divisions Hoilkut and says that they +lived on Redwood Creek and on the North Fork of the Mad. This group he +further subdivides into three parts: one, living on lower Redwood Creek, +corresponds to the Chilula of Kroeber and Goddard; another, on upper +Redwood Creek, corresponds to part of Kroeber's Whilkut; and a third, on +the North Fork of the Mad River, corresponds to a part of Loud's Wiyot. + +Merriam calls his second division Ma-we-nok. They live in the drainage +of the main Mad River and correspond to a part of Kroeber's Whilkut. + +It would appear that, except for Goddard's Chilula information (Goddard, +1914_a_), Merriam's data are the most detailed and therefore preferable. +He had informants from lower Redwood Creek, from the North Fork of the +Mad River, and from the main Mad River. For this reason I have accepted +his boundaries. I therefore propose that all the peoples previously +included under the terms Whilkut or Chilula be called Whilkut. This +seems justified by Merriam's statements, on the one hand, that the +Mad River Ma-we-nok differed but little in speach from their Whilkut +neighbors, and, on the other hand, that the other groups in the area +called themselves hoilkut or terms related to this. + +[Illustration: Map 1. Athabascan boundaries: Kroeber vs. Baumhoff.] + +[Illustration: Map 2. Athabascan boundaries: Baumhoff.] + +[Illustration: Map 3. Athabascan boundaries: Merriam vs. Baumhoff.] + +[Illustration: Map 4. Athabascan boundaries: various authors vs. +Baumhoff.] + +If this proposal is accepted, the Whilkut may then be divided into +four subgroups--the Chilula Whilkut, the Kloki Whilkut, the Mad River +Whilkut, and the North Fork Whilkut. The Chilula Whilkut would occupy +essentially the territory assigned to the Chilula by Goddard and +Kroeber--the drainage of Redwood Creek from about ten miles southeast +of Orick to about a mile above the mouth of Minor Creek. Above them are +the Kloki Whilkut, occupying the upper drainage of Redwood Creek. The +name Kloki Whilkut means "prairie" Whilkut, a name used by these people +for themselves, according to Merriam, and derived from the prairies that +occur on upper Redwood Creek. The Mad River Whilkut would be the group +in the drainage of Mad River from the mouth of North Fork as far up as +Bug Creek above Iaqua Buttes. The North Fork Whilkut would then be the +group in the entire drainage of the North Fork of the Mad River. + +The northern boundary of the Nongatl begins in the west near Kneeland +at the Wiyot boundary and runs southeast around Iaqua Buttes and the +drainage of the Mad River, then northeast to Grouse Creek. Kroeber and +Merriam agree on this boundary east of Iaqua Buttes, but west of that +landmark Merriam's line takes a northeast-southwest direction whereas +Kroeber's line runs due east-west. I have accepted Merriam's line here +because he has more detailed information than Kroeber on the neighboring +Whilkut. Neither has much information on the Nongatl themselves. + +One of the main interior lines of the Athabascans is the one which, +running north and south along the South Fork of the Eel, divides the +coastal groups on the west from the interior peoples to the east. It +begins at the mouth of the Van Duzen on the main Eel and runs south +along the Eel as far as Scotia, dividing the Nongatl from the Bear +River group. At Scotia it coincides with the Sinkyone-Nongatl boundary +and then continues in a southerly direction but, instead of lying +immediately on the river, it drifts slightly to the east to include also +the land adjacent to the stream. It continues thus near to, but off, the +main Eel until it crosses the river at about McCann, a few miles above +the mouth of South Fork. After crossing the main Eel, the line goes +south, including the immediate river valley of the South Fork of the Eel +in Sinkyone territory, until it turns west to cross South Fork at the +mouth of Hollow Tree Creek, continuing to the coast at Usal Creek. + +This section of the Athabascan boundary has been much disputed. It seems +certain that the western side of the Eel from the mouth of the Van Duzen +to Scotia was Bear River territory. This distribution is attested by +Powers (1877, p. 107), who says that the Bear River group owned as far +south as the mouth of South Fork, by Nomland's Bear River informant +(1938, map 1), by Kroeber, and by Goddard, who says (1929, p. 291), +"There was, however, one village at the mouth of Van Duzen creek which +was allied to Bear River both in its dialect and politically." This +evidence is fully in accordance with that of Merriam. + +The eastern side of the river along this stretch goes to the Nongatl by +default. Kroeber claims it for the Bear River people and Nomland's Wiyot +informant claimed it for the Wiyot (Nomland and Kroeber, 1936, map 1) +but except for these sources possession is denied by Wiyot, Bear River, +and Sinkyone alike. + +South of Scotia the area is also in dispute. Nomland and Kroeber claim +that the eastern side of the Eel from Scotia to the mouth of South Fork +is Nongatl. They say (1936, p. 40): + + In any event, Eel river from Scotia to Larrabee was not + Mattole, as Kroeber has it in map 1 of his Handbook, nor was it + Sinkyone. Nomland's Bear River, Mattole, and Sinkyone informants + were positive on the point. If Athabascan, the stretch in question + belonged to the Nongatl (Saia). Otherwise it was Wiyot. + +Merriam, on the contrary claims that this territory was definitely +Sinkyone. + +We must evaluate the statements of the informants involved before +reaching a decision on this point. Nomland's Bear River informant was +evidently not particularly accurate on boundaries, for she placed +the northern boundary of the Bear River group at Fleener Creek when +it was almost certainly at Bear River Ridge (see p. 163). Therefore +her testimony may be questioned on the present point also. Nomland's +Sinkyone informants were from the Shelter Cove Sinkyone of the Briceland +area to the south, and furthermore only one of them was said to be +reliable. Merriam, however, presents detailed evidence in the form +of place names obtained from George Burt, a very good informant who +was born and raised among the northern Sinkyone at Bull Creek. I have +therefore accepted the evidence of George Burt via Merriam, even though +several of Nomland's informants deny it. + +Actually, I have accepted Merriam's line as far south as Phillipsville +on the South Fork of the Eel, even though it conflicts somewhat with the +lines of Nomland and Kroeber. Merriam's information for this stretch of +South Fork is supported in detail by Goddard's village lists. South of +Phillipsville, Merriam's line runs along South Fork itself instead of +lying slightly east of it. This line is contradicted by Goddard, whose +informant, a native of the region, gave Goddard village names on both +sides of the river as far south as Garberville. I have accepted the line +indicated by Goddard's information along this stretch. + +South of Garberville I have relied heavily on Nomland. She had three +informants from the Shelter Cove Sinkyone--Sally Bell, Tom Bell, and +Jack Woodman, of whom she considered only the last reliable. Merriam +seems to have relied entirely on Sally Bell for information about this +group and his information should therefore be somewhat discounted. + +The Bear River-Mattole boundary is not disputed. Merriam and Nomland +agree that it begins on the coast at Davis Creek and then follows the +ridge east to the headwaters of Bear River. The two authors do not agree +on the Bear River-Sinkyone line. Nomland's boundary goes due east from +Bear River headwaters to strike the South Fork of the Eel a few miles +above its mouth. Merriam's line instead goes north to intercept the main +Eel at Scotia. I have accepted Merriam's version on the basis of George +Burt's evidence, even though Kroeber agrees with Nomland. + +The Mattole-Sinkyone boundary begins at Spanish Flat on the coast +and goes northeast from there, crossing the Mattole River just above +the mouth of Upper North Fork, Mattole River, and continuing in that +direction to the headwaters of the Bear River. I have altered Merriam's +map on this point. It shows the Mattole-Sinkyone line reaching the +coast at Big Flat, a point about six miles down the coast from Spanish +Flat. Merriam's notes say, however, that the line ends at Spanish Flat. +Merriam's line crosses the Mattole River near the town of Upper Mattole +about five miles below the mouth of Upper North Fork, but Goddard's +Mattole informant gave him villages as far up as the mouth of Upper +North Fork and I have considered this fact to be decisive. Nomland's +Mattole-Sinkyone line reaches the coast at Four Mile Creek, about five +miles up the coast from Merriam's line at Spanish Flat. This line of +Nomland's is probably a tribelet boundary, which Merriam and Goddard +give as occurring at about that point (see Mattole Tribelets). Otherwise +Nomland's boundary agrees with that of Merriam. + +Merriam's line dividing the northern or Lolangkok Sinkyone from the +southern or Shelter Cove Sinkyone begins in the east on South Fork Eel +about a mile or two above the mouth of Salmon Creek, runs west from +there through Kings Peak, and crosses the Mattole River just north of +Ettersberg, intersecting the Mattole line a few miles from the coast. +This line as given is the same as Merriam's, except that his begins in +the east at Redwood Creek instead of at Salmon Creek. The change here is +based on Goddard's village list, which indicates the present line. + +The Lassik-Nongatl line begins in the east just below Ruth on the Mad +River. It goes west from there around the headwaters of the Van Duzen +River until it crosses the Eel at the mouth of Dobbyn Creek and thence +west to the Sinkyone line. Kroeber and Merriam agree on the eastern +part of this line but Essene disagrees with them, including a much +larger portion of the drainage of the Mad and Van Duzen rivers in Lassik +territory. I am at a loss to explain this version, since Essene's +informant from the Lassik was the same one consulted by Merriam. It is +not clear that Essene's boundaries were obtained from his informants, +and this fact may explain the discrepancy. I have accepted the +Kroeber-Merriam line here. To the west of this, Kroeber's line, instead +of crossing the Eel, follows the river toward the northwest, so none +of the main Eel River valley falls in Nongatl territory. Goddard gives +villages on the main Eel which are said to be allied with others in the +Blocksburg region, so the Nongatl must have claimed at least a small +section of the Eel. I have therefore accepted the Merriam version. + +The Wailaki-Lassik boundary begins in the east at the head of the Mad +River and runs west to the North Fork of the Eel, which it crosses at +the mouth of Salt Creek. It follows Salt Creek for a short way and +then goes west to Kekawaka Creek, which it follows to its mouth on the +main Eel. It crosses the Eel here and then goes west to intersect the +Sinkyone boundary at the East Branch of the South Fork of the Eel. The +boundary as given here is identical with the one given by Merriam, +except that he includes part of the drainage of the Mad within Wailaki +territory whereas Kroeber does not. I have accepted Kroeber's version, +because it is supported in a negative way by Goddard (1924), who fails +to include any Mad River drainage in Pitch Wailaki territory. + +West of this area, Kroeber's boundary runs considerably north of +Merriam's and of the boundary I have accepted. Merriam's line seems +preferable because it is supported by Goddard and because Merriam's +information is more specific than Kroeber's. + +According to the information of Merriam and Goddard, the Wailaki may +be divided into three groups--the Eel River Wailaki, the North Fork +Wailaki, and the Pitch Wailaki. The eastern group, the Pitch Wailaki, +occupy the drainage of North Fork Eel River above Asbill Creek, Hulls +Creek, and Casoose Creek. Their western boundary begins in the north +on Salt Creek near its confluence with North Fork Eel. It runs south +from this point along Salt Creek and beyond it, crossing the North Fork +of the Eel just above the mouth of Asbill Creek and intersecting the +Yuki-Wailaki line near Summit Valley. The northern border of the North +Fork Wailaki begins in the west on the main Eel River at the mouth of +Cottonwood Creek, about three miles north of the mouth of North Fork +Eel, and runs from there eastward for about six miles, where it hits the +western boundary of the Pitch Wailaki. The western boundary of the North +Fork Wailaki is the main Eel River from the mouth of Cottonwood Creek +south to the Yuki line near Bell Springs Railroad Station. + +The Kato-Wailaki line runs from the head of Blue Rock Creek in the +east to the mouth of Hollow Tree Creek on the South Fork of the Eel in +the west. This is Kroeber's version of the boundary. Merriam's version +places the line somewhat south of this, beginning at Rattlesnake Creek +in the west and going eastward south of Blue Rock Creek. Since I have +ceded the drainage of Blue Rock Creek to the Yuki (see p. 160) in +accordance with the views of Kroeber, I must, as a corollary, accept the +northern boundary of the Kato as given by him. + +The net result of the foregoing discussion is that the line surrounding +the Athabascan peoples of Northwestern California remains much the +same as Kroeber showed it in 1925, whereas the tribal boundaries are +considerably changed. In the north, the Chilula and Whilkut occupy +almost entirely different areas and the Hupa have been divided into two +subgroups. On the coast, the Bear River and Mattole are divided, but +this division had been shown by Goddard and Nomland previously. The +Sinkyone have been divided into two subgroups and the Wailaki into three. + +A really major difference is the accretion of territory by the Nongatl. +This group is one about which least is known and this may be the reason +why the map shows their territory as so extensive. It is very likely +that data from a few good informants would show that the Nongatl +actually comprise several distinct groups. There is a hint of this in +Essene's account of Lassik war stories (1942, p. 91). He notes that +the Nai'aitci, centering near the town of Bridgeville, were distinct +from the Blocksburg people. Both of these groups are placed within the +Nongatl area. No doubt more detailed information than we possess would +show that the area which we have labeled Nongatl was actually occupied +by two, three, or even more distinct groups. + + + + +GROUPS + + +KATO + +The Kato are the southernmost of the California Athabascans (see pl. 11, +_e_ for a view of Kato territory). They are surrounded on three sides +by Yukian peoples and consequently resemble culturally the peoples of +Central California rather than those of Northwestern California. The +name Kato appears to be of Pomo origin and it was first thought that +the Kato language was a dialect of Pomo (Powers, 1877, p. 147). It was +not until 1903 that Goddard showed their Athabascan affinity (Goddard, +1903_b_). + +Information on the ethnogeography of the Kato is derived from several +sources. Merriam's notes contain some information, which seems to have +come from a man named Bill Ray, who was living near Laytonville on +August 16, 1922. This man had been Goddard's informant in 1906, when Ray +was already between sixty and sixty-five years old (Goddard, 1909, p. +68, pl. 9) and he served also as Kroeber's informant in 1923 (Kroeber, +1925_b_). + +The Merriam notes contain, in addition to several village names, a few +place and tribal names which I present herewith. + + Kato: to-chil´-pe ke´-ah-hahng + + Jackson V. people (inc. Branscom): sin´-k[=o]k ke´-ah-hahng + + Wailaki: we´-tah^ch + + Yuki of Round V.: chinch´ + + Coast Yuki: bahng´-ke´-ah-hahng + + Southern Sinkyone: ketch´-ing ke´-ah-hahng + + Tribe on the N side of Rattlesnake Cr. and E of South Fork Eel + division of Wailaki (?): tek´ ke´-ah-hahng + + Long V.: kin-t[)e]^{hl}-pe + + Laytonville: ten-tah^{ch}-tung + + Cahto Pond (now drained): to-chil´-pa + + Long V. Cr.: shah´-nah + + South Fork Eel R.: nahs-ling´-che + + Rattlesnake Cr.: tal-tl[=o]l´-kwit + + Main Eel R.: tah-ke´-kwit + + Blue Rock: seng-chah´-tung + + Bell Springs: s[)e]^{ch}-pis + + Round V.: kun-tel-ch[=o]-pe + + Jackson V.: kus´-cho-che´-pe; kas-tos´ cheek´-be + + Branscomb Mt.: k[=i]k; ch[=i]s´-naw + + +VILLAGES + +The villages of this group are mostly taken from Barrett (1908, pp. +280-283) indicated below by (B). Those taken from Merriam's notes are +distinguished by (M). The information given with each of the villages is +sometimes a direct quotation but most often is paraphrased. + + 1. netce'l[=i]gût (B). At a point about 9 mi. nearly due W of + the town of Laytonville and about 3 mi. SE of the confluence of the + E fork of the South Fork of Eel R. with the South Fork of Eel R. + This village is on top of the ridge separating these two streams + and is on the property of Mr. Jacob Lamb. + + 2. yictciLti'ñkût, "wolf something-lying-down creek" (B). On + the S bank of Ten Mile Cr. at a point about 5 mi. WNW of the town + of Laytonville. + + 3. sentca'[=u]kût, "rock big creek"; or kave'mato (Northern + Pomo dialect name), "rock big" (B). On Big Rock Cr. at a point + about 1-1/2 mi. from its confluence with Ten Mile Cr., or about + 5-1/2 mi. nearly due W of the town of Laytonville. + + sen-chow´-ten (M). Kato name for their village at Big Rock, + about 4 mi. N of their present rancheria in Long V. + + 4. ka'ibi, "nuts in" (B). On the NE bank of Ten Mile Cr. at a + point about 3 mi. downstream from the town of Laytonville. + + 5. neb[=o]'c[=e]gût, "ground hump on-top" (B). On what is + known as the Wilson ranch at a point about 1 mi. W of Laytonville. + + 6. seLgaitceli'nda, "rock white run-out" (B). About 300 yds. E + of the house on what is known as the "old" John Reed ranch about 1 + mi. N of Laytonville. + + 7. bûntcn[=o]ndi'lyi, "fly settle-upon under" (B). Just NW of + Laytonville and but a short distance from the place now occupied by + the Indians near Laytonville. + + 8. ko'cbi, "blackberry there" (B). About 1-1/2 mi. WSW of + Laytonville and on the SW bank of the Ten Mile Cr. + + 9. tc[=i]b[=e]'takût, "fir tips creek" (B). About a mile SW of + the town of Laytonville and about 1/2 mi. up the creek which drains + Cahto V. from its confluence with Ten Mile Cr. + + che-pa-tah-kut (M). A former village in the northern part of + Long V. on the James White place. + + 10. dist[=e]gû'ts[=i][=u], "madrona crooked under" (B). On the + western side of Long V. at a point about 2 mi. SSE of Laytonville. + + 11. t[=o]dji'Lbi, "water? ... in" (B). At the site now + occupied by the Indians at Cahto. This site is on the W bank of the + small creek running from Cahto into Ten Mile Cr. + + 12. bûntcten[=o]ndi'lkût, "fly low settle-upon creek" (B). On + the N bank of the northern branch of the head of the South Fork of + the Eel R. at a point about a mile SSW of Cahto. + + 13. kûcy[=i]'[=u]yet[=o]kût, "alder under water creek" (B). On + the N bank of the South Fork of Eel R. at a point about 3 mi. SW of + Cahto. This site is about 1/2 mi. E of the ranch house on the Clark + ranch. + + 14. ne'[=i]yi, "ground under" (B), probably signifying that + the village was situated under a projecting ridge. On the S bank of + the South Fork of Eel R. at a point about 3 mi. S of Branscomb. + + 15. s[=e]ne'tckût, "rock gravel creek" (B). On the NW bank + of the small stream known as Mud Springs Cr., which is tributary + to the South Fork of Eel R. This site is about 3 mi. a little S + of E of Branscomb. There are on this creek, and not far from this + village site, several springs which flow a very thin blueish mud, + thus giving the creek its name. + + 16. tontce'kût, "water bad creek" (B). About 1/4 mi. W of the + South Fork of Eel R. and about 1 mi. SW of Branscomb. + + 17. senansa'^{n}kût, "rock hang-down creek" (B). On the E bank + of the South Fork of Eel R. at a point about 1-1/2 mi. downstream + from Branscomb. + +In addition to this list, there are two other sources of information on +villages. First, Curtis (1924, 14:184) presents a list of six villages, +almost all of which it is impossible to locate. None of the names +corresponds to any given by either Barrett or Merriam, and they are +therefore suspect as village names, though they may be valid place names +and are certainly good Athabascan. In the list below Curtis' orthography +has been changed slightly. The changes follow the pattern set by Curtis +in his Hupa village lists (Curtis, 1924, Vol. 13). + +_Curtis List (1924, 14:184)_ + + chunsandung, "tree 1-1/2 mi. W of Laytonville + prostrate place" on the site of the cemetery + + tsetandung, "trail emerges At the foot of the mountain + place" W of Laytonville + + totakut, "water center" N of tsetandung. On a knoll + down which water flowed + on two sides + + chekselgindun, "they N tsetandung + killed woman place" + +yitsche Ltindung, "they found wolf place" + +seyuhuchetsdung, "old stone house place" + +The second source is the notes of Goddard, who did extensive work in +the area in 1906 (Goddard, 1909), though mostly on language and myth. +His notes contain information on two villages, neither of which can be +located because the township and range coördinates have been changed +since the time of recording and also because the name of the creek +mentioned does not appear on maps in my possession. The two cards +bearing the information have the penciled notations 51 and 52 written +on their corners. This indicates that Goddard had recorded at least 50 +other sites for the Kato, a conclusion which is further corroborated +by his own statement (Goddard, 1909, p. 67). Our information on Kato +villages is therefore correspondingly incomplete. + +_Goddard List (Goddard, Notes)_ + + ne^{=e=}[-l]soki, "ground blue tail" SW sec. 26, T. 22 N., + R. 15 W. On a flat 200 yds. N of Blue Hill Cr. and 150 yds. W of + the river. There are 3 deep pits on the eastern edge of the higher + flat. Bill thought there were 3 others 100 yds. S where a white + man's house had stood, ne'^{[-l]}s[=o]k[=i] k[=i]yahûn. + + t'un[-l]tcintcki, "leaves black tail" W sec. 26, T. 22 N., R. + 15 W. On the higher bank 50 yds. N of tûn[-l]tcintckw[=o]t, the + next creek N of Blue Hill Cr. and 400 yds. W of the river. There is + timber W. Dr. Wilson used to live there. The site has been plowed. + Bill counted six places where he thought houses had been. + + +WAILAKI + +The Wailaki, the southernmost group of Athabascans on the Eel River, +are as little chronicled as most of the Athabascan groups. As far as +geography and language are concerned we have very good information +(Goddard, 1923_a_; 1923_b_), but there is very little general +ethnography. Kroeber was able to devote to them only a little more than +three pages in the Handbook (1925, pp. 151-154), and we know scarcely +more today. + +The territory of the Wailaki lies for the most part outside the redwood +forest (pls. 11_b_, _c_) and for that reason they had access to a more +abundant supply of the food, particularly acorns, used by the interior +peoples than did most of the Athabascan groups. Perhaps for this reason, +or perhaps simply because of proximity, the culture of the Wailaki +shows considerable affinity with the culture of Central California and +correspondingly less with that of Northwestern California. This affinity +is particularly evident in their tribelet organization, which obtrudes +itself in the accounts of both Goddard and Merriam. In the groups +farther north such organization receives little attention. + +Merriam's information on the Wailaki consists for the most part of +ethnogeography, including villages, tribelets, and place names. His +informants in this group were Fred Major and Wylakki Tip. I have been +able to find out nothing about Fred Major, but Merriam gives the +following statement on Wylakki Tip. + + My informant, known as Wylakki Tip, a full blood Tsennahkennes + [Eel R. Wailaki, but see Kroeber's data, p. 229], whose father and + mother were born and lived at Bell Springs, tells me that they + belonged to the Bell Springs Canyon band known as Tsi-to-ting + ke-ah, named from the neighboring mountain tsi-to-ting. He adds + that from the mouth of Blue Rock Creek northward the Tsennahkennes + owned the country to the main Eel, and that the present location of + Bell Springs Station, on the west side of the river, is in their + territory but that the east side of the river from Bell Springs + Station to the mouth of Blue Rock Creek was held by a so-called + Yukean tribe. + +In Merriam's notes there is no general statement on the Bahneko or North +Fork Wailaki; he was evidently somewhat undecided whether they were +truly a distinct group. However, he comments on the Tsennahkennes, or +Eel River Wailaki, as follows. + +[Illustration: Map 5. Villages and tribelets of the Eel Wailaki and the +North Fork Wailaki. Roman numerals indicate tribelets, arabic numerals +village sites.] + +Tsennahkennes ... A Nung-gah^{hl} Athabascan tribe in north-central +Mendocino County, California, occupying the greater part of the +mountainous country on both sides of main Eel River from Red Mountain +and the upper waters of East Branch South Fork Eel easterly to Salt +Creek, and from a few miles south of Harris southerly to Rattlesnake +Creek. Their territory thus includes the major part of Elkhorn Creek, +the headwaters of East Branch South Fork Eel, Milk Ranch Creek, and Red +Mountain Creek, practically all of Cedar Creek, and the whole of Bell +Springs and Blue Rock Creeks. The old stage road from Cummings north to +Harris, passing Blue Rock and Bell Springs, traverses their territory. + + +WAILAKI PHONOLOGY + +It is clear that in recording Wailaki words Merriam followed the same +principles that guided him in his published works on other Californian +languages. In transcribing the Achomawi language he said (1928, p. vi), +"All Indian words are written in simple phonetic English, the vowels +having their normal alphabetic sounds." For a more precise determination +I have made a comparison of words recorded by both Merriam and Goddard. +The values of the symbols used by Goddard are taken from a list he +gives in his Wailaki Texts (1923_b_, p. 77) together with Phonetic +Transcription of American Indian Languages (Amer. Anthro. Assoc., 1916), +a report which Goddard helped prepare. + +A total of twenty-eight words recorded by both Merriam and Goddard were +found. Although the discrepancies seem great, this is because Merriam +used Webster's English orthography whereas Goddard used a technical one +modified from the old Smithsonian system. Whatever the limitations of +Merriam's orthography for considerations of grammar (which he did not +try to obtain), his recordings consistently check Goddard's independent +information and serve as complete identifications of places and +ethnographic facts. + +_Goddard's Wailaki Phonology_ + + -------------+--------------------+--------+--------+--------+-------- + | | Labial | Apical | Frontal| Dorsal + -------------+--------------------+--------+--------+--------+-------- + | fully voiced | g + | +----------------------------------- + | medium voiced | b d G + +--------------------+----------------------------------- + Stops | voiceless | + | non-glottalized | t k + | +----------------------------------- + | voiceless | + | glottalized | t' k' + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + | non-glottalized | ts tc + Affricates +--------------------+----------------------------------- + | glottalized | ts' tc' + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + | voiceless | s c + Spirants +--------------------+----------------------------------- + | voiced | + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + Nasals | | n ñ + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + Semivowels | | w y + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + | voiced | l + Laterals +--------------------+----------------------------------- + | voiceless | [-l] + -------------+--------------------+----------------------------------- + +Goddard gives the following vowels. + + i as in pique (written with an iota by Goddard) + e as a in fate + E as in met (written with an epsilon by Goddard) + a as in father + A as u in but (written with an alpha by Goddard) + o as in note + +Following is a rough correspondence between Goddard's and Merriam's +orthographies. + +_Comparison of Orthographies_ + + _Goddard_ _Merriam_ + a ah (occasionally a or e) + A ah, e, u, i (in order of frequency) + ai a, i + Ai i + b b + c s (once sh) + d d, t + e e + E e, [=a] + g [-l]g written as sk + G does not occur + h h + i [=e], [)e] (oi written i) + I i, u + k k (ky written ch) + k' k + l does not occur + [-l] kl, often not recorded at all ([-l] written sk) + m n (Goddard says n sometimes becomes m by assimilation. + Evidently it is n phonemically) + n n (occasionally ng, once not recorded at all) + ñ ng (occasionally n, twice not recorded at all) + o o (occasionally u) + s s + t t + t' does not occur + tc ch (once tch) + tc' does not occur + ts does not occur + ts' does not occur + u does not occur + w does not occur + y y, ky written ch, kiyah always written ke-ah or ka-ah + + +TRIBELETS + +The subgroups of the Wailaki (map 5) are called bands by Merriam and +subtribes by Goddard but it is clear that they correspond precisely to +the definition of tribelet given by Kroeber (1932, pp. 258-259), a fact +which Kroeber noted at the time (p. 257). Goddard says (1923_a_, p. 95): + + [They] had definite boundaries on the river as well as + delimited hunting grounds on an adjoining ridge. In the summer + and fall they appear to have been under the control of one chief, + and to have camped together for gathering nuts and seeds and for + community hunting. In winter they lived in villages and were + further subdivided. + +I. There is close agreement on the boundaries of the northernmost +Wailaki tribelet on the western side of the Eel. Merriam gives the +names kun-nun´-dung ke´-ah-hahng, ki´-kot-ke-ah-hahng, ki-ketch-e +k[=a]-ah-hahng, and ki-ke´-che ke´-ah-hahng as designations for the +group. He says the territory of this group runs from Chamise Creek +in the north to Pine Creek in the south. Goddard gives the same name +(rendered kaikitcEkaiya) and the same boundaries for the group. + +The territory north of Chamise Creek on the west side of the river is +assigned by Merriam to the taht´-so ke´ah tribelet of the Lassik. This +attribution would seem to indicate that Merriam has put his northern +Wailaki boundary too far north, that it should hit the Eel at Chamise +Creek rather than at Kekawaka Creek. Goddard calls these people the +da[-l]sokaiya, "blue ground people," which no doubt corresponds to +taht´-so ke´ah. He says, "It is doubtful that they should be counted as +Wailaki, but they were not Lassik and probably spoke the same dialect as +the Wailaki." + +II. This tribelet is called s[)e]-tah´-be ke´-ah-hahng or +s[=a]-tah´-ke-ahng by Merriam. In one place his notes say that the +territory includes land on both sides of the Eel, running south of +Indian Creek on the western side. This is clearly not so, for he refers +several times to a different tribelet occupying that area. That the +tribelet was confined to the east side of the river is further indicated +by Goddard, who gives Pine Creek on the north and Natoikot Creek on the +south as the boundaries. Goddard's name for the tribelet is sEtakaiya. + +III. Goddard says that there was a tribelet on the west side of the Eel +whose territory was bounded on the north by Natoikot Creek and extended +south to a point opposite the mouth of North Fork. His name for this +group is taticcokaiya. Merriam's name for the group in this general area +is tah-chis´-tin ke-ah-hahng. He does not give any boundaries for them. + +IV. and V. Merriam gives the following names for the tribelet occupying +the territory around Blue Rock and Bell Springs Creeks: tsi-to´-ting +ke´-ah, from the name of Bell Springs Mountain; sen-chah´-ke´-ah; +s[)e]-so ke´-ah-hahng, "Blue Rock Band"; then´-chah-tung k[=a]´-ah, +"Blue Rock Band." On the other hand, he gives the following names for +the people who occupied the west bank of the Eel for a mile or more +south of the mouth of North Fork: nin-ken-n[=e]tch k[=a]-ah-hahng; +nung-ken-ne-tse´ ke´-ah; n[)e]-tahs´ ke-ah-hahng. Goddard says that the +entire stretch from the mouth of North Fork south to Blue Rock Creek +on the west bank of the river was occupied by a single tribelet called +nIñkannitckaiya, a name clearly corresponding to Merriam's names for the +people on the west bank of the Eel, south of North Fork. I am inclined +to think that Merriam is correct and that there were two tribelets in +this area. Merriam's notes include five different references to the +southern tribelet as a separate group, so there is a distinct impression +of autonomy. If Merriam is correct in separating the two groups, the +division line no doubt falls a mile or two north of Bell Springs Creek. + +VI. On the eastern side of the river Merriam gives two names for the +tribelet holding the land south from Kekawaka Creek. He says the +yu-e-yet´-te ke´-ah was the tribelet north of Chamise Creek. Their +southernmost village, called sko´-teng, was on the east side of the +river a half-mile or a mile south of Kekawaka Creek. The sko´-den ke´-ah +Merriam gives as the name of the tribelet on the east side of the Eel +River and about a half-mile south of Kekawaka Creek. Goddard gives +i[-l]kodAñkaiya, corresponding to Merriam's sko´-den ke´-ah, as the +name of the group extending from about two miles south of the mouth of +Chamise Creek nearly to the mouth of Kekawaka Creek. Both Merriam and +Goddard indicate some doubt whether these people were Wailaki. + +VII. Merriam gives the names ch[=e]s-kot k[=e]-ah-hahng, +chis´-ko-ke´-ah, and t[=o]s-ahng´-kut for the tribelet living in +Horseshoe Bend. The first two names come from the word chis-kot, the +name for Copper Mine Creek. Goddard also gives these last two names for +the group (written tciskokaiya and tosAñkaiya, "water stands people"), +and he says their territory includes the land between Copper Mine Creek +on the south and a point a mile or two south of Chamise Creek on the +north. + +VIII. Goddard says that a tribelet named slakaiya or sEyadAñkaiya +occupied the territory between Copper Mine Creek in the north and Willow +Creek in the south. Merriam gives the name nung-ken-ne-tse´ ke´-ah to +this group, which he locates on the east side of the Eel River at Island +Mountain. He gives no boundaries for the group. + +IX. Merriam gives two names for the tribelet occupying the Indian Creek +region. The chen-nes´-no-ke´-ah was the band on chen-nes-no´-kot Creek +(Indian Cr.) from Lake Mountain to the Eel River; he also writes this +name ken-nis-no-kut ke-ah-hahng. His other name for the group has the +variants bas-k[=a]´-ah-hahng, bas-ki´-yah, bus-k[=a]-ah-hahng. This +group is said to have been on the east side of the Eel River a mile +or two north of Indian Creek (in the Fenton Range country). Goddard +gives the name bAskaiya, "slide people," corresponding to the last of +Merriam's names, for the tribelet from Willow Creek south to Cottonwood +Creek. The name refers to a hillside, usually of clay, which has broken +loose and has slid down. + +X. Merriam identifies no group as occupying the land from Cottonwood +Creek south to the mouth of North Fork. Goddard says the region was +occupied by a tribelet called sE[-l]tchikyokaiya, "rock red large +people." + +XI. Merriam says the s[=a]´-tan-do´-che ke´-ah-hahng was the name of +a tribelet on the north side of North Fork and about a half-mile from +its junction with the main Eel. The name means "rock reaching into the +water." Goddard's name for this same group is sEtandoñkiyahAñ, a clear +correspondence, and he indicates that their land was on about the last +mile of North Fork. + +XII. According to Merriam the next group up North Fork was named +s[)e]-cho ke´-ah-hahng. Its land was on the north side of North Fork a +mile or more above its mouth. Goddard has the same name for the group, +sEtcokiyahAñ; he says the people occupied both the north and south sides +of a one-mile stretch of North Fork beginning a little way below the +mouth of Wilson Creek and extending downstream from there. + +XIII. Merriam says ki´-ye ke´-ah-hahng was the name of the tribelet on +both sides of North Fork at the mouth of Wilson Creek. This is in accord +with Goddard's data. He gives the name as kAiyEkiyahAñ. Neither Goddard +nor Merriam gives the limits of this group up North Fork. Presumably +they coincide with the tribal boundary. + +XIV. According to Goddard a tribelet called nE[-l]tcikyokaiya was in +possession of the territory on the east bank of the Eel from McDonald +Creek northward to the mouth of North Fork. Merriam does not record this +group. + +XV. The southernmost tribelet on the eastern side of the Eel is called +sE[-l]gAikyokaiya, "rock white large people," by Goddard. They are said +to have occupied the territory from McDonald Creek south to Big Bend +Creek. This group is not recorded by Merriam. + + +VILLAGES + +The list of villages which follows includes all those contained in +Merriam's notes and also all those given by Goddard (1923_a_) that could +be located with accuracy (map 5). Occasionally there is a conflict +between Merriam and Goddard and then it has usually seemed best to +accept Goddard's information, since he actually visited the sites of +most of the villages he mentions. + +All the data are either from Merriam or Goddard, as indicated by (M) +or (G). Ancillary comment by myself is placed in square brackets. The +notations (Tip) and (Maj) refer to Merriam's informants (see p. 167). +The arabic numbers correspond with those on map 5, indicating separate +villages. These run consecutively from north to south, first on the west +side of the Eel (1-22) and then on the east side (23-67). + +_Villages on West Side of the Eel_ + + 1. The main village of the ki-ketch-e tribelet is said to have + been on the S side of the mouth of Chamise Cr. (M). + + kAntEltcEk'At, "valley small on" (G). The most northern + village of the kaikitcEkaiya, whose northern boundary was Chamise + Cr. + + [Both Merriam and Goddard give this as the native village + of the wife of Wylakki Tip so there is no doubt that they are + referring to the same village.] + + 2. kun-tes-che´-kut (M). Said to have been a Wailaki village + on the W side of the Eel R. a half-mile N of Horseshoe Bend Tunnel, + probably nearly opposite Horseshoe Bend Cr. (Tip). + + [Horseshoe Bend Tunnel cuts out the meander of Horseshoe + Bend. Horseshoe Bend Cr. appears to enter the Eel from the E about + a mile S of Boulder Cr. If Goddard's kAntEltcEk'At is really + kAntE[-l]tcEk'At, with the bar on the "l" dropped in error, then + these names are nearly the same. If so, kun-tes-che´-kut might + be the name of village no. 1 even though the location differs + slightly.] + + 3. basEtcE[-l]galk'At, "throw stone outside on" (G). On the + western side of the Eel, just N of the mouth of Pine Cr. + + 4. sEdAkk'añdAñ, "rock ridge place" (G). On the point of the + ridge around which the Eel turns toward the W at Horseshoe Bend. + + 5. kit-te-ken-n[)e]´-din (Tip), kit-ken-n[)e]-tung (Maj) (M). + At or near the S end of Horseshoe Bend Tunnel. It was the biggest + village of the tribelet and was said to have been the native + village of the father of Wylakki Tip. + + s[)e]-tah´-be (M). A large village on the W side of the Eel + River just S of Horseshoe Bend Tunnel near Island Mt. Station. It + was nearly opposite the mouth of Copper Mine Cr. + + tcInnagañtcEdai, "eye closed door" (G). At the base of the + ridge described in no. 4. It was said to have been the home of + Captain Jim. + + [These names may or may not refer to the same village. If + they do, it is likely that Merriam's kit-te-ken-n[)e]´-din is the + correct one. His s[)e]-tah´-be evidently refers to the name of + the tribelet, sEtakaiya, given by both him and Goddard. Goddard's + designation looks as though it might very well refer to the tunnel + and thus would be very modern.] + + 6. lacE[-l]kotcEdAñ, "buckeye small hole place" (G). This + seems to have been only a few hundred yards S of Horseshoe Bend. + + 7. kaigAntcik'At, "wind blows up on" (G). A big winter camp + about 1/4 mi. S of Horseshoe Bend. + + 8. sait'otcEdadAñ, "sand point on" (G). Also about 1/4 mi. S + of Horseshoe Bend but was about 500 ft. above the river near a big + spring. + + 9. tcIbbEtcEki, "gather grass tall" (G). A little more than + a mile S of Horseshoe Bend a very small stream runs into the Eel + from the W. On the N side of the mouth of this stream was this + house site where Captain Jim's father used to build his house some + winters and live by himself. + + 10. sEnanaitAnnik'At, "stone trail across on" (G). About a + mile S of Horseshoe Bend. + + 11. Isgaikyoki (G). About 1-1/2 mi. S of Horseshoe Bend a + small creek called Isgaikyokot enters the Eel from the W. The + village with this name was situated on the N side of the mouth of + this creek. It was the home of the father of the wife of Wylakki + Tip. + + 12. IsgaidadAbbIñlai (G). N of the creek mentioned in no. 11 + but on higher ground away from the river. + + 13. [-l]tAgtcEbi', "black oaks in" (G). About a mile N of + Natoikot Cr. on a flat above the river. + + 14. sEnagatcEdAñ, "stones walk around place" (G). About 200 + yds. N of no. 15. + + 15. sE[-l]sokyok'At, "stone blue large on" (G). About 1/2 mi. + N of the mouth of Natoikot Cr. There was said to have been a pond + here. + + 16. [-l]tcicsEyEbi', "ashes rock shelter in" (G). This shelter + was under a large rock which stood on the hillside a short distance + downstream from no. 17. Two or three families used to spend the + winter in it. + + 17. bantcEki, "war [ghosts] cry" (G). On the W side of the Eel + a little more than a mile N of the mouth of North Fork and opposite + the mouth of Cottonwood Cr. It was close to a fishing place that + the tribelet shared with the bAskaiya tribelet. + + 18. tah-t[=e]s-cho´-tung, tah-t[=e]s-cho´-ting, tah-chis´-ting + (M). 1/2 mi. or more N of the mouth of North Fork on the W side of + the main Eel. + + taticcodAñ (G). In a grove of oaks about 1/4 mi. downstream + from the mouth of North Fork on the W side of the Eel. + + 19. ne´-tahs, ning-ken-ne´-tset (M). Ne´-tahs is the name of + the town on a rocky stretch of the river. The town ran for a mile + or more S of the mouth of North Fork (Maj). Ning-ken-ne´-tset was + the name of the village which was at the fishing place opposite the + mouth of North Fork and extending S. It was also called "fishtown." + Tip's mother lived there (Tip). + + nEtacbi', "land slide in" (G). About a mile S of the mouth + of North Fork on the W side of the Eel. It was a noted fishing + place. Goddard says: "There is no mention in the notes of a village + at this point, but several Wailaki were spoken of at times as + belonging to the nEtacbi'." + + 20. sE[-l]tcabi' (G). Nearly opposite the mouth of McDonald + Cr. It was named for the large rock beneath which it stood. + + 21. tco[-l]Attcik'At, "graveyard on" (G). A large village on + the western side of the river a few hundred yards downstream from + the mouth of djoñkot. + + [The stream that Goddard calls djoñkot seems to be the one + that appears on the modern maps as Cinch Cr.; that is the only one + in the vicinity. On his map it is shown entering the Eel about + a mile downstream from the mouth of Bell Springs Cr. but it is + actually a tributary of Bell Springs Cr., joining that stream a + scant hundred yards from its mouth. On the assumption that Cinch + Cr. is, in fact, the stream that Goddard meant to indicate I have + moved the village about a mile to the S.] + + 22. sa'kAntE[-l]dAñ, "beaver valley place" (G). About midway + between the mouth of Blue Rock Cr. and Bell Springs Cr. on a fine + large flat. + +_Villages on East Side of the Eel_ + + 23. sE[-l]kaibi, "make a noise in the throat" (G). Opposite + the mouth of Chamise Cr. + + 24. tcadEtokInnEdAñ (G). Located only approximately--in + Horseshoe Bend at the point where the river turns toward the NE. + + 25. k'AcsAndAñ, "alder stands place" (G). About a mile + downstream from the point where the river turns W at Horseshoe Bend. + + 26. sEtcokInnEdAñ, "rock large its base place" (G). About 1/2 + mi. downstream from the point where the river turns toward the W at + Horseshoe Bend. + + 27. nEtcEdEtcAñk'At, "ground rolling on" (G). A short distance + W of the mouth of Copper Mine Cr. (Tunnel Cr.). + + 28. dAndaitcAmbi, "flint hole in" (G). On the downstream side + of the mouth of Copper Mine Cr. (Tunnel Cr.). + + 29. taht-aht (M). On the E side of the Eel R. at Horseshoe + Bend and opposite s[)e]-tah´-be. It was a big town (Tip). + + kaitcIlIñtadAñ, "Christmas berries among place" (G). There + was a graveyard about 1/4 mi. N of the village and just beyond the + graveyard was Copper Mine Cr. + + 30. to-ch[)e]´-ting (M). A big village on the E side of the + Eel R. at Horseshoe Bend (opposite s[)e]-tah´-be), only a short + distance S of taht-aht (Tip). It was probably less than 1/4 mi. S + of Island Mt. Station on the opposite side of the river. + + kaslInkyodAñ. "spring large place" (G). On the E bank of the + river about 300 yds. S of kaitcIlIñtadAñ, or about 1/2 mi. S of + Copper Mine Cr. + + [The names of these two villages are not the same at all and + since Goddard gives many villages in the near vicinity the chances + are good that the names do not represent the same village.] + + 31. kaslInkyobi, "spring large in" (G). A rock shelter near + Goddard's kaslInkyodAñ. A family used to spend the winter here. + Captain Jim's father-in-law was left here to die after he had been + wounded by the whites. + + 32. skEtcE[-l]kascanAñ, "mush thrown away sunny place" (G). + Evidently situated about a mile S of Copper Mine Cr., where the + river makes a slight turn toward the N. Here there is a flat 50 ft. + higher than the river and 150 ft. from it, in which 17 house pits + were counted. This village was just upstream from a rock called + skEtcE[-l]kaiyE. Each spring a mush-like substance appears on the + face of this rock and is washed away each winter. The thickness of + the deposit is supposed to indicate the abundance of the year's + acorn crop. + + 33. ah-chahng´-ket (M). On the E side of the Eel a mile or two + S of Horseshoe Bend. It was more than a mile S of to-che-ting (Tip). + + akyañk'At, "right here on" (G). Some distance N of Willow Cr. + and on the river. + + [These two names doubtless represent the same village but + neither Merriam nor Goddard gives a very exact location for it.] + + 34. slAsyanbi', "squirrels they eat in" (G). Only a + short distance S of Willow Cr. and back from the river near + nE[-l]tcAñk'At. slAsyañkot was an alternate name for Willow Cr. and + the name of the village was derived from this. + + 35. n[)e]-chung-ket´ (M). On the E side of the river about + 1/2 mi. S of ah-chahng´-ket (Tip). The inhabitants were called + n[)e]´-chung ke-ah-hahng (Maj and Tip). + + nE[-l]tcAñk'At, "ground black on" (G). Said to have been the + second one S of Willow Cr. + + [It is evident that both Merriam and Goddard have the same + name here. Goddard's location is more precise and thus has been + accepted.] + + 36. dabAstci'Añdañ, "ants' nest place" (G). A little way S + of the mouth of Willow Cr. The name comes from the name of Willow + Cr.--dabActci'Añkot. + + 37. dAstatcElai, "string (?) point" (G). Evidently only a + short distance above Indian Cr. It was said to have been a large + winter camp. + + 38. tcA[-l]sAl (G). Just N of the mouth of Indian Cr. was a + sharp rock with this name; the Indians camped near this in the + springtime. + + 39. tA[-l]djInlai, "water clayey point" (G). On the S side of + Indian Cr. The large village appears to have stood just a little E + of the NW corner of sec. 36, T. 5 S., R 6 E. Its inhabitants were + exterminated by mixed bands of white men and Kekawaka Indians. + + 40. tah-bus-che-sahng´-tung (M). A small village in the hills + 1 mi. E of the Eel R. and 1 mile S of Indian Cr. (Maj). + + 41. sE[-l]tcikyok'At, "red rock large on" (G). 1/4 mi. N of + the first creek downstream from North Fork on the E bank of the + main Eel. + + 42. chug´-ge´-tah (M). A small village on the E side of the + Eel N of the mouth of North Fork (Maj). It was about 2 mi. S of + Indian Cr. + + sEtatcikaiya (G). A tall rock is situated N of the mouth of + the first creek N of the mouth of North Fork. The village was just + to the W of this rock and was named for it. + + [The villages given by Merriam and Goddard are in about the + same place but Merriam's location is so indefinite that their + identity is uncertain.] + + 43. kai[-l]tcitadAñ, "redbud place" (G). A short distance N + of the mouth of North Fork a ridge runs down to the river. On the + northern side of the ridge a village was situated. + + 44. t[=o]n-klan´-be-ko-cho´-be (M). On the E side of the Eel + on the northern side of the mouth of North Fork (Tip). + + ton[-l]Embi', "streams come together in" (G). Situated on a + terrace N of the mouth of North Fork and on the E side of the main + Eel. In the summer of 1922 10 house pits were counted there, 4 of + them being large and deep. + + [These two sites are evidently the same, since both the names + and the locations match.] + + 45. s[=a]´-tan-do´-che ke´-ah-hahng (M). In a rocky stretch on + the N side of the North Fork about 1/2 mi. above its junction with + the main Eel. The name means "rock reaching into water." + + sEtandoñtci, "rock runs to the water" (G). On the N bank of + North Fork about 1/2 mi. above the mouth. + + 46. sEntciyE, "rock large under" (G). About 3/4 mi. above the + mouth of North Fork. The rock for which it was named, with a large + spruce tree, stands opposite the village site, on the S side of the + stream. + + 47. s[)e]-cho-ke´-ah-hahng (M). A village and band at + s[)e]-cho, "big rock," on the N side of the North Fork of the Eel + a mile or more above its mouth. "Thousands of Indians killed here" + (Maj). + + sEtcolai, "rock large point" (G). On the N side of North Fork + a little more than a mile above its mouth. + + 48. lacEnadailai, "horse chestnut stand point" (G). About 60 + yds. upstream from no. 47. A house pit 4-1/2 ft. deep was seen + there. + + [This site was no doubt included under no. 47 by Merriam's + informant.] + + 49. About halfway between the main Eel and Wilson Cr. a small + stream enters North Fork from the S (G). Near this there was a + village before the whites came. An incident there is said to have + occurred at a time when the informant's grandmother's grandmother + was small. + + 50. stAstcok'At, "rope large on it" (G). Somewhat farther + upstream than no. 49 and back a way from the bank of the stream, + also on the S side. The village is said to have been a large one + when the white people came to this region. In 1906 there was still + a house on the site. + + 51. totAkk'At, "between water" (G). Summer camp a little way + below the mouth of Wilson Cr. on the N side of North Fork. + + 52. se[-l]tcidadAñ, "stone red mouth place" (G). An old + village, occupied before the whites came. It stood between no. 11 + and the mouth of Wilson Cr. + + 53. nolEtcotadAñ, "water falls large among" (G). On the N side + of North Fork about 1/2 mi. below Wilson Cr. It was on two levels; + one near the stream, the other on a terrace some yards N. + + 54. ki´-ye ke´-ah-hahng (M). On North Fork at the mouth of + Wilson Cr. and covering both sides of North Fork and Wilson Cr. + (Maj). + + [This name is evidently the same as Goddard's name for the + tribelet on North Fork above Wilson Cr.--kAiyEkiyahAñ.] + + 55. sEnEsbInnAñkai, "rock tall its slope" (G). On the northern + side of North Fork and about midway E and W of sec. 12, T. 24 + N., R. 14 W. is a tall rock called sEnEs. Just W of this was the + village. + + 56. k'asolEtcobi', "arrowwood rotten flat" (G). On the S side + of North Fork opposite the tall rock mentioned in no. 55. The + informant said his uncle remembered the building of the dance house + when he was a small boy. + + 57. s[=a]´-yahs kun´-dung (M). A fishing camp for drying + salmon at Fishtown Spring or Upgraff fishery on North Fork about 5 + mi. up, "march till creek dries up." + + [Upgraff must be an error for Updegraff; the latter is a local + place name whereas the former is not, so far as I can see.] + + 58. sEnEstconatAñkai, "rock tall large crossing" (G). A small + stream comes into North Fork about 1-1/2 mi. above Wilson Cr. The + village of this name was situated 1/2 mi. S of North Fork and just + to the W of this tributary. The village had not been occupied in + the memory of the informants. + + 59. Another village not occupied in historic times was + situated on the S side of North Fork just above the mouth of the + stream mentioned in no. 58 (G). + + 60. s[=a]h-gah´-ket, se-kah´-ke-ah-ahng, se-ki´-ah-hahng (M). + A rancheria on the E side of the Eel R. on the S side of the mouth + of North Fork (named for s[=a]-gah-nah´-ting, the name of the land + on the S side of the mouth of North Fork in the angle between the + two rivers) (Tip). + + kai[-l]tcitadAñ, "redbud place" (G). This was apparently near + Merriam's s[=a]h-gah´-ket. + + [These different names may not represent the same village. If + these were two villages, they were very close together. Goddard + gives kai[-l]tcitadAñ as the name of another village N of North + Fork (no. 43) so it may be an error here (see pl. 11, b for a view + of this region).] + + 61. tsEgolkAllinseyE (G). A rock shelter situated back from + the river a short distance above McDonald Cr. The Indians lived + here in the winter. + + 62. ne-che´-cho-ket (M). On the E side of the Eel about a mile + S of the mouth of North Fork. It was apparently opposite part of + the elongate village ning-ken-ne´-tset (no. 19). "Salmon stop here; + great fishing; rocky place; Red Hill ground" (Tip). + + nE[-l]tcikyok'at, "ground red large on" (G). On a point of + land running down to the river on the E side just above nEtacbi', + the fishing place of the region. + + [Goddard adds some information which explains the statement + of Merriam's informant. He says, "About two-thirds of a mile below + the mouth of McDonald Creek a number of large rocks lie in the bed + of the river. This place is called nEtacbi', 'land slide in,' and + seems to have been a noted fishing place."] + + 63. sah-nah´-chung-kut, sah-nah-chin´-che ke´-ah-hahng (M). + On the E side of the Eel R. 1-1/2 or 2 mi. S of the mouth of North + Fork and near McDonald Cr. (Tip). + + 64. sel-di´-kot (M). On the E side of the Eel R. S of Bell + Springs Cr. (Maj). + + 65. s[)e]-ski´-cho-ding (M). Claimed as a Wailaki village + on the E side of the Eel R. at White Rock near Big Bend. On the + opposite side of the river from Bell Springs Station (Tip). + + se[-l]GaitcodAñ (G). On a flat on the E side of the river. + "The east and west section line dividing sections 84 and 85 of T. + 24 N., R. 14 W. was noted as passing through this flat." + + [These two names doubtless represent the same village; the + names are similar and the locations are the same.] + + 66. chin-to´-bin-nung (M). On the upper part of McDonald Cr., + about 3 mi. up from the Eel (Maj). + + 67. chus-nah-teg-gul-lah chen-ne-tung (M). An old village + about 2 mi. S of North Fork and 3 mi. E of the Eel. + + +PLACE NAMES + +The following list includes ethnogeographic information taken from +Merriam's notes in addition to information on creeks from Goddard +(1923_a_), the latter being especially important because most villages +are located with respect to streams. All streams and rivers may be found +on map 5. Locations of other features have been given after consulting +the appropriate United States Geological Survey (USGS) quadrangle +but they are not shown on the map. For this area the quadrangles are +Alderpoint (1951), Hoaglin (1935), Leggett (1952), and Spyrock (1952). + + Asbill Cr.--djoñot (G). + + Bell Springs Cr.--sAlt´okot (G). + + Bell Springs Mt.--tsi-to´-ting; si-to´-ting (M). This is the + mountain cut through by Bell Springs Cr. + + Bell Springs Station (native name for the site of the + station)--sah´-ten´-t[)e]´-te; sah-ten-t[)e]^{hl}-t[)e] (M). Bell + Springs Station is on the W side of the Eel about halfway between + Blue Rock Cr. and Bell Springs Cr., about the same place as village + 22. In fact, Merriam's names for this site may correspond to + Goddard's name for village 22, sa'kAntE[-l]dAñ. + + Big Bend Cr.--dAndaikot (G). + + Blue Rock--sen-chah´-tung (M). Evidently this is near Blue + Rock Cr. + + Chamise Cr.--sah-nah´-ting; shah-nah-ting (M); canAndAñkot (G). + + Chamise Cr. crossing--ses-ki´-be (M). + + Chamise Cr., mouth of--sun-ti´-che, soon-di´-che (M). + + Cinch Cr.--djoñkot (G). Goddard evidently has this creek + placed incorrectly on his map. If I understand his description, it + should be a tributary of Bell Springs Cr. rather than of the Eel R. + directly. + + Copper Mine Cr. (Tunnel Cr. on the more recent + maps)--chis´-kot, ch[=e]s-kot (M); tciskot (G). Both Merriam and + Goddard say that this name refers to red paint and was probably + suggested by the color of the water in the creek. This is also + responsible for the English name. + + Cottonwood Cr.--tgActcEkot (G). The English name is a + translation of the Wailaki name. The creek is unnamed on USGS maps. + + Dawson Flat--choo´-e-kun-tes´-te (M). This flat was W of Lake + Mt. between Horse Ranch and Fenton Ranch. + + Eel R.--tan´-cho-kut (M). Eel R. valley--bus´-be (M). This + name refers to a part of the valley of the main Eel R., especially + the E side, between Horseshoe Bend and North Fork. + + Eel R., E branch of South Fork--to-k[=a]-kut (M). + + Eel R., Middle Fork--tahng-cho-skus (M). The junction of the + Middle Fork with the main Eel was called t[=o]s-kahs-k[=a]. + + Eel R., North Fork--bah´-ne-kut (M); banikot (G). + + Eel R.-North Fork junction--ch[=a]-lin´-ding, kl[=a]-lin-ding + (M). + + Harris region--tah-sahn-ting´, tahs-ahng (M). Harris is a + small town about 8 mi. W of the main Eel R. in the territory of the + Lassik (according to Merriam's boundaries). + + Hettenshaw Valley--ken-tes´-tung (M). This valley is in Lassik + territory about 12 mi. N of the Wailaki boundary. It lies between + the headwaters of the North Fork of the Eel and the headwaters of + the Van Duzen R. + + Horse Ranch Cr.--kus´-ken-tes´-be (M); canAñtcakot (G). These + are clearly not the same names but sometimes streams have alternate + names. Cf. Willow Cr. below. + + Horseshoe Bend--ch[=e]s (M). The bend is named for the red + copper spring of Copper Mine Cr. ki´-ke-che (M) is the name for + the western part of the loop of Horseshoe Bend, to-sahng´-kut, + t[=o]s-ahng-kut (M) is the name of the part of Horseshoe Bend N of + Island Mt. Horseshoe Bend is the big switchback curve in the Eel R. + about 6 mi. N of the mouth of North Fork. + + Indian Cr.--chen-nes-no´-kut, ken´-nis-no´-kut (M). The name + Indian Cr. does not appear on any of the USGS maps but it is the + name used by Merriam. + + Island Mt.--bahng-kut, bahn-kut (M); bañk'At (G). Island Mt. + is a range of hills bordered on the E by the Eel R. and extending + from the mouth of North Fork in the S to beyond Horseshoe Bend in + the N. + + Jewett Cr.--sel-di´-kot (M); dAsk'Ekot (G). + + Kekawaka Cr.--kas-n[=a]´-kot, kahs´-ne-kot (M); kasnaikot (G). + + Lake Mt.--s[=a]-kahn-den, se-kahn´-ting (M). Lake Mt. is about + 3 mi. E of the Eel and 3 mi. N of North Fork. + + McDonald Cr.--sah´-nah-chin-che (M); canAñtcIntci (G). + + Middle Trail--be-ten-na´-be (M). This trail was in the hills E + of the Eel R. about a mile south of Indian Cr. + + Mina--to-les´ cho´-be (M). Mina is a modern place name for a + town about 2 mi. N of North Fork and 5 mi. E of the main Eel R. + + Natoikot Cr.--no-toi´-kut (M); natoikot (G). I have given this + creek its Wailaki name because it has no English name and is not, + in fact, located on modern maps. It is said to have run into the + Eel R. about 1-1/2 mi. S of Island Mt. Station, which is on the + southern side of Horseshoe Bend. It has been placed on the map in + accordance with the topography shown on USGS Hoaglin Quadrangle. + + Pine Cr.--ten-di´-kot (M); lacEtcikot (G). Merriam was not + certain that his name was correct. + + Pipe Cr.--taht-so´-kut (M). + + Poonkinny Ridge--nel-kis´-te (M). Merriam says this is the + name of the open ridge between the main Eel R. and the northern + part of Round V. That area is marked Poonkinny Ridge on the USGS + Spyrock Quadrangle. It is in Yuki territory. + + Rattlesnake Cr.--to-nah´-ling (M). This creek is a tributary + of the South Fork of the Eel R. and forms a part of the southern + boundary of the Eel River Wailaki, according to Merriam. + + Rockpile Mt.--sen´-ning ah´-kut (M). This mountain is said to + be on the E side of the Eel R. S of Alder Point, but the name does + not appear on modern maps. + + Round V.--ken´-tes-cho´-be (M). The inhabitants of Round V. + were called ken´-tes cho´-be ke´-ah, a locative rather than a + tribal name. + + Summit V.--ken-tes´[-l]-be (M). Summit V. lies about 2 mi. SE + of the bend of North Fork and seems to have marked the southeastern + limit of North Fork Wailaki territory. It is said that there was + once much camass there. + + Willow Cr.--dabActci'Añkot, slAsyañkot (G). The latter was + used occasionally for the stream. + + Wilson Cr.--dat'olkot (G). + + +ETHNOZOÖLOGY AND ETHNOBOTANY + +The following notes are from Merriam's records. + + Badger is called ye-ku-gus-cho, "he pulls into his hole." + + The Steller Crested Jay is called chi-cho, while the + California Jay is chi-che. In speaking of related species the + Indians often indicate the larger by the suffix _cho_, the smaller + by _che_. + + The Owl is called bis-chil-lo-che if it is small, the Great + Grey Owl is bis-chil-lo-cho. + + The Crow is kah-chan-che, the Raven is kah-chan-cho. + + The Meadow Lark sings in the daytime; the Yellow-breasted Chit + sings at night. + + The Bluebird is a dangerous bird. If a person throws a stone + at it, he should shout first to attract its attention, otherwise it + will throw a pain to him. + + The Junco is a great rustler, always busy hunting for food. + + The Chewink, or Towhee, called Nahl-tse, was instrumental in + procuring the first fire. In the very early days his parents threw + him out. He located the fire and Coyote-man went and got it. + + The Kildeer Plover is called nah-til yah-che, "necklace + wearing." + + The Toad is Rough Frog. + + The Cicada is used as a remedy for headache. The live insect + is pushed up into the nose, where, by kicking around, it makes the + nose bleed, thus curing the headache. + + The Dragonfly feeds rattlesnakes. + + Oak galls, called kim-mos, are excellent for sore eyes, and + also for suppression of urine in children. For weak eyes, the fresh + juice of a green gall is dropped into the eye. (It is astringent + and an excellent remedy and is a common eye drop among many + California tribes.) + + Oak mistletoe is used as a medicinal tea, also as a head-wash, + and sometimes for bathing the entire body. + + The thick creamy juice of the milkweed is called "snake milk." + + +ETHNOGRAPHY + +Each tribelet had its own chief and its own hunting, fishing, acorn, +and seed grounds. In winter the families of each band were scattered +along the river in small rancherias, each consisting of from four to +seven families, mostly blood relations, living together in two or three +houses. Usually there were seven or eight people in each house. + +The winter houses were of split pine slabs, standing upright or sloping +in at the top to form a conical house (pl. 11, _a_). + +People dying at home were buried. Those dying at a distance were burned +(cremated) and their burned bones were wrapped in buckskin, carried home +in a pack-basket, and then buried. + + +PITCH WAILAKI + +The Pitch Wailaki are close relatives of the Eel River Wailaki. They +live in the drainage of the North Fork of the Eel above Asbill Creek. +Virtually nothing is known of this group except their villages and +tribelets, which were recorded by Goddard (1924). Presumably they are +similar in culture to the Eel River Wailaki and the Round Valley Yuki. + +Merriam's notes contain very little information concerning the Pitch +Wailaki. He apparently was never in contact with any informants from +that group and what information he gives is derived from the Eel River +Wailaki. The following summary is presented verbatim from his notes. + +_The Che-teg-ge-kay._--The most southeasterly of the southern +Athabaskan tribes of California and consequently the southernmost of +the Nung-gah^{hl} division. They call themselves Che-teg-ge-kah (Pitch +Indians) and are nicknamed Si-yahng (sand-eaters). Neighboring tribes +call them Che-teg-gah-ahng and Wylakke. + +Beginning on the northwest just below the junction of Salt Creek with +North Fork Eel River (a short distance southeast of Hoaglin Valley) +their northern boundary extends from Salt Creek northeasterly along the +south side of Rock Creek and of Van Horn Creek to its junction with Mad +River, where it turns easterly, crossing the long ridge known as South +Fork Trinity Mountain immediately south of Kelsey Peak, and continuing +easterly to the upper waters of South Fork Trinity River, the west bank +of which it follows upstream to the southwest of North Yolla Bolla +Mountain, where it ends. From North Yolla Bolla the eastern boundary +follows the crest of the high divide southerly past Hammerhorn Peak to +Buck Rock (4 or 5 mi. north of Anthony Pk.) where it turns westerly. +From this point the southern boundary runs west-northwest to North Fork +Eel River, passing just south of Blue Nose Mountain and Hulls Valley +to the northern part of Summit Valley just south of Bald Mountain, and +crossing North Fork Eel River a few miles south of Mina. Salt Creek +forms the principal part of the western boundary. + +They had many summer camps but only two principal winter villages: +To-nis-cho-be (named for an unidentified blue flower), a large village +with a roundhouse situated on the site of Mina on what is now known +as the Charley Moore place; and Uk-ki, situated on Hulls Creek at the +southeast base of Bald Mountain. They always wintered on Bald Mountain +Ridge. + +They had also a permanent summer fishing camp called Ko-sen-ten, known +to the whites as Fishtown, located on Fishtown Creek, a small tributary +rising on Buck Rock and emptying into North Fork of Middle Fork Eel +River directly east of Leach Lake Mountain. + +Their houses were of bark and conical in form. + +Among the enemies of the Che-teg-ge-kah was a related Athapaskan +tribe which they called Theng-tah-hahn (called Then-chah-tung by the +Settenbiden) vaguely described as on the main Eel River between Island +Mountain and Bell Springs. + + +TRIBELETS + +The rest of the information on the Pitch Wailaki presented here concerns +tribelet and village organization and is taken from Goddard (1924). He +lists four tribelets among the Pitch Wailaki (Roman numerals, map 6).: +I, t'odAnnAñ kiyahAñ; II, t'okya kiyahAñ; III, tc'i'añkot kiyahAñ; IV, +tcokot kiyahAñ. + + +VILLAGES + +The villages belonging to each of these tribelets are listed below +(Arabic number, map 6). All are from Goddard's lists. + +I. _t'odAnnAñ kiyahAñ_ + + 1. t'otcadAñ. On the N side of North Fork not far below the + mouth of Hulls Creek. The site was sheltered by ridges on the E and + W and by the main mountainside on the N. Four pits were counted. + + This was the only site visited but the names of other villages + of the group were obtained. In their order downstream from Hulls + Creek they are AntcAnyacbAnnAñ, "pepperwood slope;" sEtcAmmi'; + nE[-l]=g=indAñ; lawasonk'ait; t'AntcankyodAñ. At this last there + is said to have been a large conical earth-covered lodge and many + dwellings. + +II. _t'okya kiyahAñ_ + + 2. [-l]Eliñkyobi', "streams flow together large in." On the + W side of North Fork just upstream from the mouth of Hulls Creek, + situated close to the hillside on a bench about 50 ft. higher than + the river. The site is divided by a gulch on the upstream side of + which, it was said, there had once been houses. Four distinct pits + and 3 less distinct ones were seen there. + + 3. tAntcInyasbAnnAñ. Nearly opposite nando'ndAñ on a point + of land running toward the SW. About 75 ft. above the stream 2 + pits, one above the other, were seen. No more could well have been + accommodated. + + 4. nando'ndAñ. On the E side of the river and about 1/4 mi. + above the mouth of Hulls Creek, 30 ft. above the bed of North Fork. + Four house pits were counted there, one of which was 15 ft. in + diameter and 5 ft. deep. This was the village of Goodboy Jack's + father. + + 5. kAllata. Named for a big jagged rock standing N of the + village site. It was on the W side of the river 1/4 mi. N of + tAntcInyasbAnnAñ and 300 ft. higher than the river. A grove of oaks + stands on a rounded point where 3 house pits were seen. A gulch on + the southern side furnished water in winter. + + 6. tco'Ammi'. On the W side of the river about 1/4 mi. + upstream from kAllata. The site is on a wide point of land covered + with oaks and pepperwood trees. There is a sheer rock on the + opposite side of the river. Three pits were seen here. + + 7. tAltcAskIñ. Named from a knoll, tAltcAs. Situated on the + slope of a large ridge around the end of which North Fork swings, + from flowing SE, to S. It was about 500 ft. higher than the stream + and distant from it about 1/8 mi. Here once stood an earth lodge, + the pit of which was 30 ft. in diameter. The center post was said + to have been 18 ft. high. The doorway was toward the N. Goodboy + Jack remembered going into this house when he was a small boy. + Messengers had been sent out to invite people from a distance of + two days' travel and Indians from the main Eel R. and from the + north were present. + + 8. sAñ'AnyE. Named from a very large rock standing on the + E side of the river. The village was on the W side a little + downstream from this rock. On a bench 30 ft. above the river bed + were seen 5 house pits and above were 6 more, one above the other, + on the slope. In this village lived tAntcAnyacta', who had charge + of the earth lodge at tAltcAskIñ, and si'idonta, who was "boss" of + all the villages of the t'okya kiyahAñ, especially when they camped + together in summertime. + + [Illustration: Map 6. Villages and tribelets of the Pitch + Wailaki. Roman numerals indicate tribelets according to Goddard + (1929); arabic numerals mark village sites.] + + 9. t'AntcAntantE[-l]dAñ, "pepperwood flat." About 100 yds. S + of the large rock called kai[-l]tsotci on a small bench on the + mountainside about 1,000 ft. above North Fork. Three pits were + found. A rock shelter higher on the hillside and to the S was + pointed out. At this village, shortly before the coming of white + people, lived dA=g=a'tco, "large beard," chief of this village + and of annEnE'tcAñ, of all the t'okya kiyahAñ, in fact. He was + succeeded by his son kissEkE', who was killed by the whites. + + 10. kai[-l]tsotci canAndAñ. Named for the large rock + kai[-l]tsotci, under the shelter of which the village stood. Four + pits were seen here and N of a small ridge were 3 others. + + 11. annEnE'tcAñ. On the NE side of the river stand two huge + rocks, the upstream one called sE[-l]tcAnnAñ, the downstream one + sAnAn. Between these two rocks flows a creek and on its N side, 75 + ft. below the summit of the rocks, were 3 house pits in a hollow. + A little S and 100 ft. higher were found in succession 3, 2, and 5 + pits. + + 12. mAntc'aik'At. On the mountainside N of a large rough + ravine and about 900 ft. higher than the bed of North Fork. Four + pits were found. + + 13. mIstco'ca'nAndAñ. Up the hill from no. 12. It was not + visited. + + 14. sE[-l]tcAnnAnt'a. Named for a high rock, sE[-l]tcAnnAñ, on + the S side of which there are 5 pits and, 100 yds. below, 6 more. + The site is about 700 ft. above North Fork and has a wonderful + outlook on the valley of that stream. + + 15. k'AckAntE[-l]dAñ, "alder flat." On the W side of the river + on a curving bench. Two pits were found close to the hillside, and + 2 nearer to the stream. Downstream on a little bench there were + also 2 indistinct ones, said by Jack to have been used long ago. + + 16. sE[-l]tcAnnAñ yE. At the base of the rock mentioned in no. + 14. Three pits were found on a small bench. + +III. _tc'i'añkot kiyahAñ_ + + 17. lonbAstEdAñ. On a flat on the S side of Casoose Cr. a + short way above its mouth. There were some unoccupied buildings + there at the time of Goddard's visit. The place was seen from the + trail on the N side of the creek. + + 18. sE[-l]kantcilai'. Mentioned as situated on the E side of + the creek below no. 25. + + 19. Goddard gives no name or other information for this + village but it is shown on his map. + + 20. sEttcitcikItdatdAñ, Named for a rock, settci. It was at + the base of a mountain on the N side of the creek and just above + the flood waters. It had a good SE exposure. Three pits in a row + were found. + + 21. yIctAnnEbi', "wolf's road in." About 300 yds. below the + large butte mentioned in no. 23. It was across an open knoll and + back from the creek somewhat, so the sun reaches the spot. There + are 2 pits there. Steelhead salmon are able to come up the creek + this far. + + 22. kIlkokyodAn. On the S side of the butte mentioned in no. + 23 and about 100 yds. distant. Four large pits were noticed. + + 23. kIkokyokInnEdAñ. Named for the bushy butte at the base of + which the village stood. The site is 100 ft. higher than the creek, + on its NW side just below a canyon. Three pits were seen. + + 24. mAñk'AtdAñ. Named from a small pond, near which are + deserted buildings and an old orchard. A hundred yards NE of this + pond, back against the hill, 4 pits were found in a row, 2 more + above them, and 2 others near by, making 8 altogether. The last + chief of this village was named tcAsnainIñaita'. + + 25. I[-l]t'Aktcibi'. Named from black oaks. It is nearer the + creek than no. 24. The number of pits was not recorded but signs of + a village there were unmistakable. + + 26. t'AntcigIt'tcAñ. On the W side of the creek nearly + opposite no. 27. It was N of a small creek with running water and + of a ridge which runs down to the main creek and terminates in a + great, nearly sheer cliff. The village site is about 500 ft. higher + than the stream. Eight pits in two rows were counted. + + 27. k'aickontE[-l]dAñ. On the E side of Casoose Cr. on a flat + 100 ft. higher than the creek, which flows just below it. The + village site is near a post which marked the old boundary between + Trinity and Mendocino counties. Two pits were seen. + + 28. tc'iañmiyE. On the E side of and 100 ft. higher than + Casoose Cr. It was 100 yds. downstream from the beginning of the + canyon. Five pits were counted. + +IV. _tcokot kiyahAñ_ + +The winter villages of this group were on Red Mountain Cr. Goodboy Jack +said that he did not know the village names. The impression had been +received that Salt Creek V. was inhabited but Jack said it was too cold +to live there in the winter. Presumably it was the hunting ground of the +tcokot kiyahAñ. + + +LASSIK + +The Lassik occupied the drainage of the main Eel River between the +mouths of Dobbyn and Kekawaka creeks and the territory east of there +to the crest of the Coast Range. There is almost no ethnographic +information on this group in the literature except a few notes gathered +by Essene (1942) when he was compiling a Culture Element List for the +area. Even the geographic information on this group is weak. Merriam +does not seem to have spent much time among them. Goddard may have +recorded their villages but, if so, I have been able to find only a +small part of his data. What there is I give below. + +Merriam records only random notes on the Lassik. His informant from that +group was Lucy Young, the same woman Essene worked with so effectively +(Essene, 1942; see also Kroeber's data, App. II). According to Merriam, +she lived with her daughter, Mrs. William Clark, on a ranch about two +miles south of Zenia; Mrs. Clark's husband came originally from Hyampom. +Merriam seems to have visited Lucy Young in 1922. His only statement on +the group follows. + + Sit-ten-biden keah ... Main Eel River from Fort Seward region + on north, southerly to Harris and Kekawaka Creek; westerly to South + Fork Eel River; easterly to Forest Glen and South Fork Trinity + River near Kelsey Peak. + + +TRIBELETS + +Merriam's notes contain no systematic information on the tribelets of +this group but do give the following miscellaneous data. + +Kos-kah-tun-den ka-ah is the Settenbiden name for a related tribelet in +the Blocksburg region [the territory E of Alder Pt.], now extinct. Their +language is the same as that of the Bridgeville group but with many +words different from Settenbiden. + +Sa-tahl-che-cho-be is the Settenbiden name for the band on the east +side of the Main Eel River just below the mouth of Kekawaka Creek. +This tribelet is the "sko-den ke-ah" of the Eel River Wailaki. Neither +Merriam nor Goddard was sure whether the group ought not more properly +to be included in the Lassik or the Wailaki. + +Taht-so keah is the name of a tribelet to the north of the Eel River +Wailaki which the latter said was related to them. This group, together +with the sa-tahl-che-cho-be, is said to constitute the then-chah-tung +tribelet of the Lassik. + + +VILLAGES + +For the most part the Lassik villages recorded by Merriam (and listed +below) cannot be located, hence they have not been placed on the map. + + Kahsh-bahn. A Lassik village on the W side of the main Eel R. + about 2 mi. above (S of) the mouth of Jewett Cr. This was a big + town and there were lots of acorns near there. + + Kes-tah-che. On the E side of the main Eel R. nearly opposite + (a little above) the mouth of Jewett Cr. + + 'Ki-che-be. On the site of the present (1923) store at Ruth on + the Mad R. This was a big town with many houses and a sweathouse. + There were lots of deer, bear, and acorns in this area. During + the cold weather, usually in January, a dance, which lasted three + nights, was held in this village. + + Sa-cho-yeh. A large village on the E side of the main Eel R. + about 2-1/2 mi. S of Alder Pt. + + Sa-tahl-che-cho-be. The name means "red rocks." On the E side + of the main Eel R. about 1/2 mi. or a mile below the mouth of + Kekawaka Cr. There were falls and a whirlpool there. + + Tah-kah-ta-cho-be. On the E side of the Mad R. on a flat near + the Hay place about 10 mi. above Ruth. It was a big town with a + sweathouse. + + Taht-so. On the Underhill ranch, which was owned by Glenn or + Green at the time Merriam was in the area (1920's). Evidently it + was somewhere in the Harris region W of the main Eel R. + + Tha-cho-yeh. On the main Eel R. on a flat under a high + standing rock. The rock is now called Cain Rock. It is on the E + side of the river about 3 mi. S of Alder Pt. + + Tha-ken-nes-ten. The name means "talking rock." The village + was on the E side of the main Eel R. near a big rock which stood at + a bend of the river at the Johnson place (near a big white house). + It was a big town with a sweathouse. + + Tha-tah-che. A large winter village in Soldier Basin on the + North Fork of the Eel (near present Gilman place). This was a big + town but had no sweathouse. In the winter they hunted deer and bear + here. + + To-be-se-a-tung. On the E side of the Mad R. above the Bushman + place. It was about a mile above the river. + + To-sos-ten. On the E side of the main Eel R. a mile or two + above Alder Pt. + +There is some ambiguity in Merriam's notes on the status of the Lassik +living in the western part of their territory near the South Fork of +the Eel. The Sinkyone George Burt told Merriam that a group called the +To-kub´-be ke´ah or To´-kah-be held the land on the east side of South +Fork from Rocky Glen Creek south to above Garberville. This tribe was +said to be centered on the east branch of South Fork and in the Harris +region and to be a different tribe from the one on the main Eel River +at Alder Point and Kekawaka Creek, but Merriam himself has refused to +accept this assertion. + +Goddard's information indicates that the east bank of South Fork was +owned by the Sinkyone, and it is so detailed that it has been accepted +here (see p. 164). + +Goddard's unpublished material on the Lassik consists of a single map +(here reproduced as map 8), which apparently shows the locations of 27 +villages. A list of what are presumably the village names accompanies +it, but Goddard changed the numbers on his map. Hence on our map the +correct name may not be assigned to each site. + +_Goddard's Lassik Villages_ + + 1. gastc[=i]kdûñ + 2. k[=o]nte^{l}tc[=i]dûñ + 3. satcin[=i]tc[=i]dûñ + 4. naslintce + 5. ist'etatc[=i]dûñ + 6. t[=o]kseye + 7. kiñk'ûtek[=o]nte^{l}dûñ + 8. k'ûct[=o]t[=o]dûñ + 9. d[=i]y[=i]ckûk + 10. nûndûkkatûndûñ + 11. k[=o]nte^{l}tc[=i]dûñ + 12. g[=o]sn[=o]lindûñ + 13. t[=o]tcadûñ + 14. sait[=o]tc[=i] + 15. nûnsûn^{l}tc[=i]kkinne^{=e=}dûñ + 16. y[=i]stcûttcadûñ + 17. tois[=i]b[=i] + 18. lesbatc[=i]tdûñ + 19. k'ûstc[=i]kdûñ + 20. tcûggûstatc[=i]^{=e=} + 21. lesbaitc[=i]^{=e=} + 22. setatc[=i]^{=e=} + 23. kast[=o]ntc[=i]^{=e=}dûñ + +Goddard lists other names, presumably for the Lassik villages, as +follows: sekû[-l]ne, tectatalindûñ, dûltc[=i]kyacdûñ, t'o-todûñ, +k'ûsnesdûñ, ne ga b[=i], kûttantc[=i]tc[=o]dûñ. The sites corresponding +to these names cannot be located. + +[Illustration: Map 7. Presumed Nongatl villages in the Bridgeville +region.] + +[Illustration: Map 8. Lassik villages in the Alder Point region.] + + +NONGATL + +The Nongatl are almost entirely confined to the drainages of the Van +Duzen River and upper Mad River. Their culture is the least known of +any group in northwestern California. Merriam evidently did not work +in their area although he recorded a few of their words given him by +George Burt's wife. George Burt was a Sinkyone, but his wife was born +and raised near Bridgeville. Goddard recorded some villages for this +group, whose names are given below. Nomland worked with someone from the +Nongatl in 1928 (Nomland, 1938, p. 9), but her results have not been +published. + +The territory of the Nongatl lies, for the most part, east of the main +redwood belt. It is therefore no doubt well supplied with oaks, and +plant foods are thus readily available. Salmon are abundant in the Van +Duzen River (pl. 10, _c_) and Yager Creek but not in the Mad River +in eastern Nongatl territory. In much of their territory then, the +subsistence patterns of the Nongatl must have differed from those of +most of northwestern California, where fishing was of primary importance. + +According to Merriam (1923) the word Nung-kah^{hl} is "a general or +blanket name used by themselves for all the southern Athapaskan tribes, +from Iaqua and Yager Creek on the north to the northern border of +Round Valley on the south, thus including the Athapaskan Wilakke." In +anthropological literature, however, especially in the work of Kroeber +and Goddard, this name has come to be used for the group living between +Iaqua Buttes and Mad River on the north and Dobbyn Creek on the south. +Merriam's name for this group is Kit-tel´. He does not seem to have +obtained any information from them although one of his notes mentions +the fact that the wife of George Burt, his Lolangkok Sinkyone informant, +was a Kit-tel´ woman. + +At times Merriam seems to have confused the Nongatl with the Lassik. In +his general statement on the Nongatl, which follows, he lists them as +Lassik although the area in which he places them marks them as Kit-tel´ +or Nongatl. + + Las´sik ... Name (from Chief Lassik, now dead) in common use + for a Non-ga´h^{hl} tribe occupying a rather large area, extending + from Iaqua Butte in the latitude of the mouth of Eel River, + southerly to Dobbyn Creek and to the head of Van Duzen River, and + from the eastern boundary of the Lolahnkok of Bull Creek and South + Fork Eel River easterly to Mad River and the crest of the long + ridge known as South Fork Mountain, and southerly to within about + two miles of Ruth on Mad River; to the headwaters of Van Duzen + River (but not reaching Kettenshaw Valley), and to Dobbyn Creek on + the main Eel; thus including the entire course and drainage area of + Larrabee Creek. + + There is doubt as to the northern boundary of the so-called + Las´sik for the reason that I have not been able to obtain the + necessary vocabularies for comparison. Goddard's information points + to a division south of the Bridgeville region but I have been told + by both the Nek´-kan-ni´ of Bear River and the Lolahnk[=o]k of Bull + Creek and South Fork Eel that the language is exactly the same from + Iaqua Butte southerly and that the languages of the Nek´-kan-ni´ + and Lo-lahn-k[=o]k do not differ essentially from that of the + Larrabee Creek region. + + The Indians over whom Chief Lassik held sway had no common + tribal name but consisted of a number of bands or subtribes, now + mostly or quite extinct, said to have spoken the same or closely + allied dialects. + + However, since the entire drainage basin of Larrabee Creek is + included in their territory, it may be desirable to adopt the term + Kos´-ten ke´-ah, by which term the Larrabee Creek band was known to + neighbors on the south--the Set-ten-bi´-den ke-ah. + + +SUBGROUPS + +There is evidence of several subgroups among the Nongatl, but it is not +known whether these were tribelets or dialect divisions. Essene (1942, +pp. 90-92) got information from the Lassik woman Lucy Young indicating +that there was a distinct group around Blocksburg, which the Lassik +called Kuskatundun, and another group around Bridgeville they called +Nai'aitci. This latter group is said to have been a roving band which +preyed on all the neighboring peoples. + +Goddard's village data indicate six other groups but do not give +boundaries. These were as follows. + + bûsk[=o]tk[=i]ya. In the neighborhood of Indian Cr. in the + upper part of the drainage of Yager Cr. (map 9). + + tcillûndûñ. On the upper reaches of North Yager Cr. (map 9). + + bûstc[=o]b[=i]k[=i]ya. In the vicinity of the junction of + North and Middle Yager creeks. The language of this group was said + to be the same as that of the tcittelk[=i]ya (map 9). + + senûñka. On upper Larabee Cr. in the vicinity of Blocksburg + (pl. 10, _e_, _f_). This no doubt is the same as Essene's + Kuskatundun, which was the Lassik name for the group (map 10). + + tcittelk[=i]ya. On the Van Duzen R. above Bridgeville. Appears + to be the same name as Merriam's Kit-tel´. + + na'aitcik[=i]ya. On the Van Duzen above the tcittelk[=i]ya + group. This name appears on the Goddard map from which map 1 was + taken but is not otherwise recorded. This is evidently the same as + Essene's Nai'aitci. + + k[=o]sdûñk[=i]ya. On the South Fork of the Van Duzen, + including Larabee V. + + +VILLAGES + +The Nongatl villages recorded below are all taken from Goddard's +unpublished notes (maps 7, 9, 10). This is evidently far from a complete +count but it is clear that there were about as many villages in the area +covered by these maps as in other parts of the Athabascan area. + +_bûsk[=o]tk[=i]ya group (1-7, map 9)_ + + 1. In the swag of a large ridge running toward the SSE to the + junction of the main components of Indian Cr., perhaps a mile from + it. There is one deep pit. There is a flowing creek 200 yds. E. + + 2. A single pit found by Pete E of a small stream flowing + south into Indian Cr. from the lowest place in the ridge at Big + Bend of the Mad R. Nearly 1/2 mi. from Indian Cr. W of a hill above + which the wagon road passes. This is where Goddard camped in 1906. + He hunted all around here without finding other pits. + + [Illustration: Map 9. Nongatl villages on Yager Creek.] + + [Illustration: Map 10. Nongatl villages in the Blocksburg + region.] + + 3. k'onûseb[=i]'. On a point running down SSW toward Indian + Cr. There were two pits near the creek and two more 200 ft. up the + hill. A few large and small oaks were growing there. Water was to + be had a few yards E. Pete saw a house there when he was a boy. + + 4. W of a small stream flowing into Indian Cr. from the N, and + E of a large flat. There was a flat place with dirt thrown out in + front of it but with no pit. About 1/8 mi. E on the round end of a + ridge was a fairly evident pit and a sekal. + + 5. About 200 yds. E of the small stream mentioned in no. 4 + were a few small pits. + + 6. One pit was on the W bank of a S-flowing branch of Indian + Cr. Small ridges N and S of it form a small basin, giving it + protection from the winds. Madrone and black oaks are growing + there. It is possible that a depression on the southern ridge is + also a house pit. + + 7. On a small ridge on the E side of the branch of Indian Cr., + which flows from the S past Fork Baker ranch buildings. About 1-1/2 + mi. north of these buildings Pete found 3 pits. He said there were + small streams N and S of the ridge. Goddard did not visit the place + but it was pointed out by Pete as W of a big Douglas spruce tree + and a large rock. Goddard described it as above. + +_tcillûndûñ group (8-12, map 9)_ + + 8. On the slope N of North Yager Cr. close to the county road + and about 100 yds. from the bridge. There are 2 pits close to the + wagon road and 1 or 2 a little farther N. The site is 65 ft. higher + than the bridge. + + 9. kactc[=o]tc[=i]b[=i]', "redwoods..?.. in." On the N side + of North Yager Cr. at the W end of a flat of about an acre. There + are a few redwoods on the opposite side of the creek. Six pits were + found about 100 yds. back from the creek. Pete had heard of the + flat but not that Indians lived there. A hunter told Goddard of the + Indians being killed there by whites. + + 10. About 1/4 mi. up a branch which flows into North Yager Cr. + from the north. On the W side of the creek on a rounded ridge were + 3 pits, 2 of which were very distinct. + + 11. On a small flat on the N side of Yager Cr. and close to it + Pete saw 2 large deep pits. They were about 1/4 mi. downstream from + the branch where village 10 was found. + + 12. tse'dûttc^{l}bûtta'dûñ. A half-mile N of North Yager Cr. + at the edge of Douglas spruce and tanbark oak timber. Stones used + by the Indians were lying near the water and 2 pits were found + there. To the W, on the crest of the ridge, there were 5 pits at + the S end of the timber. A cabin stands there. + +Goddard lists five more sites found in this vicinity on North Yager +Creek but they are not named and their locations are indefinite so they +will not be given here. + +_bûstc[=o]b[=i]k[=i]ya group (13-18, map 9)_ + + 13. senindûsc[=i]m[=i]. On the W bank of North Yager Cr. 1/4 + mi. below a waterfall of the same name. Two pits were located 100 + ft. above the creek in brush and timber. On the same side of the + creek but 1/4 mi. downstream were 4 more pits, in one of which a + sekal lay. + + 14. nakat[=o]dûñ. On the E side of North Yager Cr., on a flat + now covered with huckleberry brush. Pete found 2 pits here. On the + W side of the creek, a little downstream, were 2 more pits. The + flat had been badly washed away by freshets. + + 15. Two pits were found among the redwoods and thick brush at + the junction of North and Middle Yager creeks. + + 16. ist'egab[=i]', "madrones in." Just at the eastern edge of + the timber on a point running down toward Middle Yager Cr. were 4 + pits. + + 17. k[=o]ntc[=o]wetc[=i]kinnedûñ. About 1/4 mi. N of Middle + Yager Cr. On a small flat on a hillside, facing SW in open timber + above a small stream. There were 7 pits here. Pete had heard that + there used to be a village so situated. + + 18. An overhanging rock on the N side of Middle Yager Cr. + shows signs of occupation and there is a pit near by. + +_senûñka group (19-35, map 10)_ + + 19. On a little point 200 yds. N of Curless' house. There is + one pit. Charlie Taylor's grandmother was born here, according to + Curless, who showed the site to Goddard. This was the most northern + village of the senûñka on Larabee Cr. + + 20. t'[=o]kintcab[=i]'. On the hillside on either side of the + stream which crosses the road about a mile S of Curless' place. + It is nearly a mile from Larabee Cr. and is close to the timber. + The village was in a line of Douglas spruce south of an oat-field. + There were 7 large pits on the W side of the stream and 5 on the E + side. With one exception these were N of the fence; others may have + been filled by plowing. + + 21. t'[=o]kintcab[=i]'. On the E side of Larabee Cr. a + good-sized stream flows across the county road by a group of farm + buildings. On the E side of the road close to the N side of this + stream are from 4 to 6 pits. Douglas spruce and tanbark timber with + brush obscured them. On the W side of the road is a large sheep + barn. W of this barn are 4 pits, some quite uncertain because the + ground has been cleared of large Douglas spruce timber. There is a + large plowed flat 1/4 mi. W, near Larabee Cr. Andrew's wife told + Pete of such a place where there used to be many Indians. + + 22. k'ûcna'aidûñ (?). In a swag on the W side of a gulch lined + with Douglas spruce and tanbark oak timber with exposure toward the + S. There are 5 distinct pits. + + 23. On a point 200 yds. N of the junction of the two main + components of Larabee Cr., W of a small stream. There were 4 pits, + only one of which was large. The end of a pestle was lying in this + one. + + 24. On the E side of Larabee Cr., between it and the county + road, on the S side of a small stream. There was one pit. The + building of the road may have destroyed others. + + 25. On a large flat N of the junction of the two components of + Larabee Cr. and a little to the E. There were 10 pits. There is a + cabin and a corral here and many pits may have been filled in. + + 26. On the hillside N of the eastern component of Larabee Cr. + Pete thought there were 3 pits. There had been slides there and + Goddard was not sure of them. + + 27. On the N side of a large branch of Larabee Cr. from the E, + 200 yds. N of where it is joined by a stream from the N. The stream + from the E is bûstadûñk[=o]t. There were 3 pits among the Douglas + spruce and black oaks. + + 28. On the E side of the Eel R. about 3/4 mi. N of the mouth + of Coleman Cr. at the edge of timber on a small bench. There were 2 + small house pits. + + 29. On the E side Of the Eel about 300 yds. N of the mouth of + Coleman Cr., 75 yds. back from the river and 40 ft. above it. There + were 2 large deep pits. The exposure is SW. + + 30. canak[=i]', "creek tail." On the E side of the Eel R. S of + the mouth of Coleman Cr. There were 3 pits close to the creek but + high above it on the bank, 2 on a flat 25 yds. S, and 2 more near a + dry gulch 200 yds. S of the creek. Near the creek the brakes were + so thick that many pits may have been overlooked. This place was + mentioned by Charlie in 1908. + + 31. On the E side of the Eel R. about 500 yds. S of the mouth + of Coleman Cr. on a flat close to the S side of a gulch lined with + maple and peppernut trees. There were 8 pits here and 7 or 8 more + from 50 to 75 yds. S. + + 32. N of the knoll which is just below the forks of Coleman + Cr. There was 1 pit. + + 33. On the E side of the Eel R. about 300 yds. N of the mouth + of Mill Cr. on a brushy point. There were 5 pits. + + 34. On the E side of the Eel R. N of the mouth of Mill Cr. + just S of a big rock. There were 2 pits. + + 35. nadaitcûñ. This name was supplied by Charlie in 1908 as + belonging to the village at the mouth of a large creek on the E + side of the Eel R. above Coleman Cr. + + +SINKYONE + +The Sinkyone occupied the territory on the west side of the South Fork +of the Eel from Scotia south to Hollow Tree Creek. From the Mattole +boundary at Spanish Flat south to the Coast Yuki line at Usal Creek they +held the coast. + +We have more ethnographic information about the Sinkyone than about +most of the Athabascan groups. Merriam's material and Goddard's data +combined provide a virtually complete village list for the northern, +or Lolangkok, Sinkyone and a few villages for the southern, or Shelter +Cove, Sinkyone. Kroeber's Handbook (1925_a_, pp. 145-150) gives a fair +amount of general ethnography and this is well augmented by Nomland's +paper (Nomland, 1935). + +Sinkyone territory is in the redwood coastal zone and this location no +doubt reduced somewhat the supply of vegetal food. The Sinkyone were, +however, well supplied with fish products by the Eel River, which not +only had an excellent salmon run but also provided quantities of lamprey +eel. + +On the basis of Merriam's linguistic evidence the Sinkyone have been +divided into a northern group, called Lolangkok after the native +name for Bull Creek, and a southern group, called Shelter Cove after +a sheltered spot on the coast midway between the Mattole and Yuki +boundaries. This division is rendered somewhat questionable by the +unreliability of Sally Bell, Merriam's Shelter Cove Sinkyone informant. +It is doubtful, however, whether Sally Bell's linguistic information +could be falsified. In any case, the separation is partly verified by +Goddard's data and I have therefore accepted it. + +The Merriam notes contain a comparatively large amount of material on +the Lolangkok Sinkyone. The following general statement on that group is +taken verbatim from that source. + + The Lo-lahn´-k[=o]k. Information is from George Burt, a member + of the tribe, who was raised on Bull Creek at the rancheria called + Kahs-cho´-chin-net´-tah about seven miles upstream from Dyerville, + at a place now known as Schoolhouse Flat, and who now lives near + Fortuna (1922). + + The territory of the Lo-lahn´-k[=o]k began on the north at + Shively and covered a narrow strip on the east side of the main Eel + River to Dyerville, and a much broader area on the west side, and + continued southerly on the west side of South Fork Eel River nearly + to Garberville. On the west it not only covered the South Fork + drainage, but continued over Elk Ridge to the head waters of Upper + Mattole River. + + The southern boundary ran a little north of Ettersburg, + Briceland, and Garberville. + + Informant states that on the east side of South Fork Eel River + their territory included only the immediate river valley. + +Merriam's informant from the Southern Sinkyone was Sally Bell. She had +evidently lived at Briceland for more than thirty years when she was +interviewed in 1923. Nomland (1935, p. 149) says of her that she was +"born Needle Rock; reared from childhood by white settlers, married +Coast Yuki, Tom Bell; blind, senile, sees spirits in rafters, etc." +(See fig. 1, _d_.) This group Merriam describes only in a brief general +statement, summarized as follows. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1. Athabascan tattooing noted by C. Hart Merriam. +_a_, _b_. Whilkut women, _c_. Bear River woman from a sketch made by +Merriam in 1921. _d_. From a sketch made by Merriam of the Shelter Cove +woman named Sally Bell.] + + To´-cho´-be ke´ah is their own name and the Lolahnkok name + for the tribe (and village) in the Briceland region (between the + South Fork of the Eel and the coast). It is used also in a larger + sense for all bands speaking the same dialect from the west side of + the South Fork of the Eel River (in the Garberville region) to the + coast. The Set´tenbi´den [Lassik] call this group Yis-sing´-kun-ne. + The name of the group is pronounced To-cho´-be ke´ah by the + Lolahn´k[=o]k and Taw-chaw´-be-ke´ah by themselves. + + +TRIBELETS + +None of the tribelets of the Sinkyone is described or located +specifically enough to permit the drawing of boundaries. Hence they are +merely listed here, with available location data. Nomland (1935, p. +151) says: "Two informants always gave names of land areas in place of +village names." These names are no doubt those of tribelets. + + chi-chin-kah ke-ah (Merriam). This is the name for the + tribelet between the upper waters of Bull Cr. and Elk Ridge. + Nomland gives the name chacingu´k for the group in the ridge N of + Briceland, which is evidently Elk Ridge. + + yese'kuk (Nomland). This is given as the Mattole R. area, + possibly a tribelet designation. + + The two tribelets listed above are the only ones noted in the + area of the Bull Creek or Lolangkok Sinkyone. The following, all + from Merriam except where noted, are in the area of the Shelter + Cove Sinkyone. + + to-cho-be ke-ah (taw-chaw-be keah). Name for the tribelet and + village in the Briceland region between the South Fork of the Eel + and the coast. Used in the larger sense for all the tribelets from + Briceland south to Usal Cr. totro'b[=e] (Nomland, 1935). This was + the name of the Briceland area. + + nahs-lin-che-ke-ah. This was the name of the tribelet on South + Fork S of Garberville. senke'kut (Nomland). This is given as the + area "to the South Fork from Garberville." + + tahng-ah-ting keah. This was the Bull Creek Sinkyone name + for the Shelter Cove and Point Delgada tribelet. They were called + tahng-i-keah by themselves and by the Briceland Sinkyone. Kroeber + (1925, p. 145) gives tangating as the place name for Shelter Cove. + + Usal (Yosawl). This is the southernmost tribelet of the + Briceland Sinkyone, said to extend from Usal Cr. to Shelter Cove. + According to Kroeber (1925, p. 145) "This word seems to be from + Pomo Yoshol, denoting either the Coast Yuki or the Mankya, both of + whom are north of the Pomo; but yo is 'south' and shol 'eastward' + in that language." + +The following names are given by Nomland for Sinkyone areas. They do not +correspond to Merriam's tribelets and are probably just place names. + + anse'ntakuk The land south of Briceland + + cusacic'ha The region north of Garberville + + yenekuk The area southeast of Briceland + + yese' The coast area to the Mattole boundary at Four Mile Cr. + + +VILLAGES + +Most of the Sinkyone villages given here are taken from Goddard's notes. +A few are also given by Merriam. In the list the source is indicated +by (G) for Goddard, (M) for Merriam. Merriam's notes contain, besides +the village names, a list of place names on the Eel and on South Fork, +running from Scotia to south of Garberville (see pp. 191-193, map 13). +In areas where Merriam's material can be compared with Goddard's these +place names nearly all turn out to be village names. It seems likely +therefore that, in other areas also, nearly all are village names. In +calculating population (see p. 216), I have occasionally used these to +augment the village count. + +_Lolangkok Sinkyone villages on the main Eel (map 11)._--Of the +following villages, the two north of the mouth of South Fork are from +Merriam's notes, for which George Burt was the informant. Merriam also +gives several place names for the area below the mouth of South Fork, +and it seems probable that most, if not all, of these were actually +villages rather than mere landmarks; this was certainly so farther south +on South Fork. + +[Illustration: Map 11. Villages of the Lolangkok Sinkyone.] + +Above the mouth of South Fork the villages are from Goddard's notes; the +informant was Charlie and the information was gathered in 1903 and 1908. +It is possible that these villages are not Sinkyone. However, there is +no specific evidence for attributing this region to the Nongatl and it +is known that Charlie was a Lolangkok Sinkyone, so I have placed them in +this latter group. Goddard has given the section, township, and range +locations as he did for the preceding villages. These have been helpful +in locating the sites, but I have omitted his notations because they +are no longer accurate; the maps have been changed since the time of +Goddard's original work. + + 1. lah-s[=a]-se´-te (M). At Shively on the main Eel R. + + 2. kah´-li-cho´-be, "growing flat" (M). At a place now called + Englewood, a small settlement 9 mi. E of Scotia bridge. The name is + said to refer to things growing up there. + + 3. seûstcelindûñ (G). On the S bank of the main Eel not far + downstream from Dyerville. + + 4. t[=o]nesdadûñ (G). On the NE bank of the Eel directly + across from seûstcelindûñ. + + 5. tetcinne (G). On the E side of the Eel upstream from + t[=o]nesdadûñ. A big rock, pointing downstream, is said to project + into the river there. + + 6. tûggûstc[=o] dasañke (G). On the E side of the Eel S of + tetcinne. A large rancheria in an open place. + + 7. naltcûñka (G). On the W side of Eel R. S of tûggûstc[=o] + dasañke. There is a big slide there. It is below Camp Grant on the + S side, according to Charlie, 1903. + + nahl-tsin´-kah (M). Camp Grant. + + 8. t[=o][-l]tciñyasta' (G). On the E side of the Eel about 1 + mi. above naltcûñka. A large rock stands back of the village site. + + 9. tadûttc[=i]' (G). On the E side of the Eel not far above + t[=o][-l]tciñyasta', at the mouth of a large creek in which salmon + run (tadak[=o]k, Thompson Cr.?). Above Camp Grant. + + 10. tcillûñdûñ (G). On the E side of the Eel 1/4 mi. + above tadûttc[=i]'. An open place without a creek. (Given as + k[=i]lûndûñk[=i]a by Charlie in 1903.) + + 11. ne'gakak, "moss"? (G). On the W side of the Eel opposite + tcillûñdûñ. + + 12. ne'tcink[=o]k (G). At the mouth of a creek on the W side + of the Eel some way above ne'gakak. + + 13. gactc[=o]bi', "redwoods in" (G). In a large open flat + among the redwoods on the E side of the Eel above ne'tcink[=o]k. + Given by Charlie in 1903 as kûctc[=o]bek[=i]a on the S side. + + 14. On the E side of the Eel just S of a creek which flows + down a steep rough bed on a rather high bench are 4 pits. The + ground is black with refuse and cooking stones lie about. The river + enters a canyon N of this creek. A round timbered butte is close to + the mouth of the creek on the N. A great timbered butte seems to + occupy the E bank of the river for several miles. + + 15. seda'dûn, "rock mouth place" (G). On the E side (W also?), + where the river flows out between rocks. A small creek is there. + About 2 mi. above gactc[=o]bi'. + +_Lolangkok Sinkyone villages on South Fork (map 11)._-- + + 16. [-l]tcûnta'dûñ (G). Said to have been on the W side of + South Fork and the S side of the Eel R., where the store and saloon + of Dyerville now stand. + + chin-tah´-tah (M). The flat occupied by Dyerville; this is no + doubt the same as the name given by Goddard. + + 17. kahs-cho´-chin-net´-tah (M). A large village on Bull Cr. + about 7 mi. upstream from Dyerville. The place is now known as + Schoolhouse Flat. + + 18. [-l][=o]lûñk[=i]' (G). On the S bank of Bull Cr. at its + mouth, in large redwood timber. There were 10 pits along the bank + of South Fork and the pit of a yitco', 8 paces across, about 200 + yds. W of the mouth of Bull Cr. A large redwood, hollowed by + fire, had fallen, the floor being 4 ft. below the ground. Charlie + remembered seeing Indians living in it. Charlie thought there used + to be three or four houses on the S side of the creek, but we found + no evidence of them. Three men were once killed here by whites, and + a woman was shot through the hips; she lay here a day or two and + died. One of the white men, named Steve, cut a piece from the arm + of one of the Indians, built a fire, cooked it, and ate it. The + best man of the Indians escaped. + + lo-lahn´-k[=o]k (M). Bull Cr. Merriam does not mention a + village at its mouth. + + 19. [-l][=o]lûñk[=o]k y[=i]bañ (G). On the E bank of South + Fork opposite and N of the mouth of Bull Cr. Two pits were seen + directly across from Bull Cr. and 2 about 100 yds. downstream. They + are in heavy redwood timber, but receive a good deal of sun because + they are close to the river, which flows NW at this point. + + 20. s[=o]snoibûndûñ (G). On the E bank of South Fork about a + mile S of the mouth of Bull Cr. Five pits were counted in small + redwood timber, where there is a spring which supplied the village. + There used to be a yitco' here, in which Charlie remembered dancing + when he was a small boy. + + 21. nûnsûntc[=o]tc[=i]', "butte large mouth" (G). On both + sides of the mouth of Brush Cr. (Canoe Cr.) in large redwood + timber. On the N side are 6 pits, 5 of them in a row back about 30 + yds. There are seven pits on the S side of the creek, some of them + much plainer than others. The father of Albert's wife, Sally, came + from this village. + + nahn´-sin-cho´-ke (M). See Place Names. + + 22. sedj[=o]cb[=i]' (G). On the E bank of South Fork, which + flows toward the W at this point. A stream from the E (Feese Cr.) + flows in a little above the village. There are many tanbark oaks + growing near by, which Charlie suggested were the reason for the + village's being located here. Seven pits could be distinguished; + the clearing away of timber may have obscured some others. The name + setc[=o]sdiñ was also given by Charlie. Tc[=o]s means vagina, "what + woman has." + + s[=a]-ch[=o]s-te (M). See Place Names. + + 23. gûtta'bûndûñ, named from a deep hole in the stream (G). On + the W side of South Fork, where it flows toward the NE just below + Myer's. The site has been completely washed away. Charlie's father + belonged here and Charlie lived here when a boy. Jack, Charlie's + half-brother, was born at this village. There used to be a yitco' + and a large hollow tree in which a family used to spend the winter. + + kah-tah´-be (M). See Place Names. + + 24. tantañaik[=i]' bûndûñ (G). On the E side of South Fork. + A creek, along which are many tanbark oaks, flows into South Fork + on the opposite side and a little above. The name of the creek is + tantañaik[=o]k (Coon Cr.). The site is just below a garden. The + place was so grown up with brakes it was impossible to count the + pits. + + 25. t[=o]dûnni', "water sings" (G). On the NW corner of Myer's + Flat on the right bank of South Fork, where it completes its course + toward the W and turns toward the NE. The site has been washed + away. There used to be large peppernut trees growing there. A few + are still left. The name of Myer's Flat is kûnteltc[=o]b[=i]. It is + also mentioned as kontelky[=o]b[=i]. + + ken´-tes-cho´-be (M). See Place Names. + + 26. sestcicbandûñ (G). On the right bank of South Fork on a + narrow bench between the hill and that stream. There is an eddy + in the river just above, which furnished good fishing, and many + oaks are on the hills. The site received plenty of sun because the + river flows W at this point. Four pits were seen. Also given as + sûstc[=i]cb[=i], "rough like a rasp." + + ses-che´-is-ke (M). See Place Names. + + 27. sebûggûnna', "rock around" (G). On the right side and + close to South Fork just downstream from a rocky point around which + the river changes its direction from S to NW. Fourteen or fifteen + pits could be distinguished, most of them quite distinct. + + s[=a]-bug´-gah-nah´ (M). See Place Names. + + 28. sek[=o]ntc[=o]bandûñ (G). On the left side of South Fork + nearly opposite sebûggûnna'. The sandy bench is covered with + brakes. Five pits were made out. Charlie lived here for four + years after he came back from the reservation. Also mentioned as + tañaib[=i]. + + 29. s[=o]ldek[=o]k bûkk[=i]'d[=u]ñ (G). On a small flat + covered with large redwood timber on the N side of South Fork and + on the W side of Elk Creek (s[=o]ldek[=o]k), which flows into it + from the N. Seven pits were counted along the banks of the river + and the creek. + + s[=o]l´-te-che (M). See Place Names. + + 30. sente[-l]tcelindûñ, "rock flat flows out place" (G). + Close to the W bank of South Fork near a deep fishing place. There + are three pits between the county road and the river. Also called + sentelduñ. + + sen-t[)e]^{ch}-be (M). See Place Names. + + 31. ca'nak[=i]', "creek trail" (G). On the W bank of South + Fork 100 yds. N of the mouth of Salmon Cr., in large redwoods. + The river has washed the soil away so no evidence of occupation + remains. Willow brush is now growing there. Also called + natonank[=o]k bûttc[=i]'dûñ. + + sah-nah´-k[=o]k (M). Name for Salmon Cr. See Place Names. + + 32. tc[=i]stc[=i]bi' (G). On the E bank of South Fork opposite + the mouth of Salmon Cr. It is on the end of a ridge. Charlie had a + ne'y[=i]k' here after returning from the reservation (village site + not visited). This village was mentioned by Sam as his birthplace. + His mother may have been from here. Also referred to by Charlie as + canak[=i]' and tcûstc[=e]k[=o]ok. + + 33. nant'[=o]' (G). On the N side of Salmon Cr. in a bend. + Large redwoods fill the valley of the creek as well as the + particular site of this village. Five deep, distinct pits were + seen. There are said to be one or two on the south side of the + creek. + + 34. k[=o]nte[-l]b[=i], "flat in" (G). On a large flat, through + which Salmon Cr. flows. The village was on the N side of the creek + near where Tomlinson's barn now stands. There is a spring there + near a pepperwood tree. This flat is now in peach orchard. + + 35. kaslintc[=o]'dûñ, "riffle large place" (G). On the N side + of Salmon Cr. about 400 yds. upstream from k[=o]nte[-l]b[=i]'. + + 36. setcinnabatse tcelindûn (G). On the N side of Salmon Cr. + in a basin-like flat. Four pits were seen near the creek and 4 in a + row back about 50 yds. against the base of the hill. There were 2 + more pits in front of the last 4, making 10 in all. There is heavy + Douglas spruce and tanbark oak timber on the southern side of the + creek. About 200 yds. upstream is a waterfall, which provided fine + fishing, since large salmon could not jump the falls. + + 37. bandûñ (G). On the end of a ridge, W of a small run lined + with peppernut trees. About 200 yds. NE of se[-l]tcindûñ. There + were 5 pits, 2 of which were very large. + + 38. setcinnabatse (G). On a flattened end of the ridge E of + se[-l]tcindûñ, 300 yds. S and a little W of it. Two pits were + certain. + + 39. se[-l]tcindûñ (G). On the E side of a gulch, in which + there was flowing water in July, about 300 yds. N of Salmon Cr. + There were 4 or 5 pits. The ground is strewn with black stones. + + 40. tcebanedûñ (G). On the flattened portion of a ridge, with + southern exposure. Black oaks and buckeyes are growing there. + Seven pits were to be seen with black stones lying in them. Great + broken rocks lie in a gulch to the west. About 350 yds. NNW of + se[-l]tcindûñ. + + 41. setc[=o]'seye (G). A large rock, with the overhanging side + facing SE. A rim of earth showed where the house wall used to be on + the W. The E was left open. About 1/4 mi. W of the falls of Salmon + Cr. + + 42. t[=o][-l]elindûñ, "water flows together place" (G). On the + flat W of Salmon Cr. and W of a large creek flowing into it from + the S (South Fork Salmon Cr.). Four pits are close to the bank of + Salmon Cr. and a fifth was partly caved in. One was seen on the + lower part of the flat to the S. + + 43. nesdai'dûñ (G). Said to be on a side hill. + + 44. to[-l]elindûñ, "water comes together place" (G). Said to + be where three creeks join, forming the South Fork of Salmon Cr., + about 5 mi. from its mouth. Distinguished from the village at the + mouth of the same creek by being called "small." + + 45. ses[=o]sye' (G). At the end of a ridge running down to + Salmon Cr. from the E. So close to the bank of the stream that + one pit has been undermined. Four remain. About 1/2 mi. NW of + to[-l]elindûñ. + + 46. ne'kañk[=i]' (G). In the saucer-shaped end of a ridge, + close to the E bank of Salmon Cr. and facing a little S of W. + Opposite, a large creek, called ne'kañk[=o]k, flows in from the W. + There are 9 pits, which may still be seen. Five of them, situated + close to the base of the hill, are very large and deep. Black oaks + grow there. + + 47. ne'i[-l]ga[-l]dûñ, "land shinny-playing place" (G). On a + flat close to the E side of Salmon Cr., which swings around it. A + gulch heads in the cedar grove N of the Hunter ranch buildings. + Twelve or 13 pits were counted, 5 of which were quite distinct. + + 48. seistc[=i]' (G). About 1/2 mi. E of Salmon Cr. on the + flattened southern slope of a ridge about 100 yds. from its crest. + There are 8 pits in a row and 1 other, not in line with them. There + is a gulch 100 ft. S of the row of pits. Cedars, black oaks, and + buckeyes grow there. A small pond of water is E of the site. + + 49. mûñkkasaik[=o]k (G). On the W side of a branch of Salmon + Cr. which flows from the N about 1/2 mi. W of the Burnell ranch + house. Two pits are close to the stream and 4 or 5 are 10 or 15 + ft. higher. The higher ones have good sun in the winter. The trail + crosses the creek at this place. + + 50. setc'ûnt[=o]dûñ (G). On the W side of the South Fork of + the Eel about 1/4 mi. above the mouth of Butte Cr. (nûnsûnk[=o]k), + which provided desirable fishing. A large rock stands there close + to the river. There are said to have been four houses. This site + was not visited. It was mentioned by Charlie as sesuñt[=o]; he said + it was the most southerly village of his people. Sam called it + senûns[=i]mkûk and said it belonged in Charlie's territory. + + The first name given by Goddard is evidently related to + Merriam's s[=a]´-chen-to´-te, "water against rock," which was said + to be a place in the river near Goddard's setc'ûnt[=o]dûñ. See + Place Names. + +_Shelter Cove Sinkyone villages (map 12)._--The following list of +villages comes almost entirely from Goddard's notes (G); relevant +comments by Merriam are noted (M). Goddard's informants were Sam, +Albert, and Charlie, of whom the first two were Shelter Cove Sinkyone, +the last Lolangkok Sinkyone. + + 1. ke'kestc[=i]' (G). Close to South Fork on the E side about + 1/8 mi. S of the mouth of Fish Cr. (kekek[=o]k). A large house with + a garden is just below. A deep place in the river provided fishing, + in addition to the creek. Three pits and a grinding stone were + found. Plowing had probably filled in other pits. The first store + of Phillipsville stood here. According to Sam (1903), this was the + most northern village of his people. + + k[)a]-kes´-k[=o]k (M). Fish Cr. + + 2. kûtdûntelb[=i]', "flat in" (G). At the NW part of the + Phillipsville flat. It is said to have been a large village. There + is fishing in an eddy just upstream. The site has been washed away + and therefore was not visited. + + ket´-tin-tel´-be (M). At a place called Phillipsville, 18 mi. + S of Dyerville. The site is in an orchard on a ranch and has a fine + redwood grove and a good camping place. + + 3. seb[=i]ye, "at base of rock" (G). On the E side of South + Fork at the upper end of the Phillipsville flat. The site has been + plowed and was in fruit and garden when visited. One pit could + still be seen. The river flows nearly W, hence the village has + southern sun. Large redwoods occupy the left bank of the stream. A + deep place here provided fishing. + + s[)a]-be-y[)e]´ (M). The flat on the E side of South Fork, S + of Phillipsville. See Place Names. + + 4. tcingûlge[-l]dûñ (name of a tree) (G). On the right bank + of South Fork just below a turn to the E. Between the road and the + river two pits were seen. There is a schoolhouse on the E side of + the road. Many eels were caught near this village. + + chig-gel´-e-yes´-ke (M). A place 1.9 mi. S of Phillipsville. + See Place Names. + + 5. da[-l]tcimmûndûñ (G). On the right (S) bank of South Fork, + where it flows W around a long ridge sloping down from the E. + Seven pits were counted between the county road and the river, + which may have carried others away. A large creek, seyekok (Rocky + Glen Cr.), empties N of this place. This village was mentioned as + t'altcimmûndûñ by Albert in 1907. + + [Illustration: Map 12. Villages of the Shelter Cove Sinkyone.] + + s[)e]-tes´-k[=o]k (M). Rocky Glen Cr. See Place Names. + + 6. tca'lûñk[=i]' (G). On the E bank of South Fork. A small + stream flows down from the E. Three pits were found on the N side + of it and two on the S side. The place had been plowed. Charlie + said there used to be many houses there. This village was given by + Albert as tca'lûntc[=i]. + + 7. da[-l]kaik[=o]k (G). On a flat 50 yds. E of the county + bridge across Buhne Cr. (now called Dean Cr.), along both sides of + the stream. Seven pits were found on the S side of the creek and + two on the N side. The road and plowed fields may have reduced the + number. This village was mentioned by Sam in 1903 as a settlement + of his people. + + tahs-ki´-ke (M). Merriam attributes this village to the + to-kub´-be people, who ranged E from here. + + 8. da[-l]kaik[=i]' (G). On the W side of South Fork, opposite + the mouth of Dean Cr. Albert said there used to be a village there. + + This is evidently the village Merriam refers to in the + paragraph above on village 7. + + 9. [-l]tûggan[=o]b[=i]' (G). On a flat on the E side of South + Fork about 1/4 mi. above the mouth of Redwood Cr. Goddard noted + that the place had a favorable location, but did not find the pits. + Albert said there used to be a village there. + + stuk´-kan-no´-be (M). Name for the flat at this place. See + Place Names. + + 10. k[=o]sc[=i]k[=i] (G). A short way below Garberville, + according to Sam (1903). Charlie said it was named k[=o]ssetc[=i]' + or k[=o]setc[=i]' and that it was just below Garberville on the E + side of the river. There used to be a store there. + + 11. seb[=i]yedadûñ, "rocks under..?... place" (G). A village + at Garberville. + + 12. kûnte[-l]tc[=o]b[=i]', "flat large in" (G). On a flat + above Garberville. + + ken-tes´-che tahng-ah´-te (M). A beautiful deep valley on + South Fork just SW of Garberville. + + 13. Usal (not necessarily the native name). Not mentioned by + Goddard, Merriam, or Nomland, but Gifford (1939, p. 304) says that + both Coast Yuki and Sinkyone were spoken here (pl. 11, _d_). + +Following are a number of Shelter Cove Sinkyone villages which I have +not been able to locate precisely. + + kahs´-cho-so´-be (M). A village of the Briceland Sinkyone + on South Fork about 4 mi. S of Garberville and not in sight from + the present highway. It may not actually be one of the Briceland + Sinkyone villages. + + kaicañkûk (G). On a ridge below Garberville. Information from + Sam, 1903. + + [-l]tc[=i]kûk (G). On a ridge below seyadûñ on South Fork. + Information from Sam, 1903. + + t[=o]kûbb[=i] (G). On a ridge above Garberville. Information + from Sam, 1903. seya(e)dûñ (G). On a ridge on the E side of South + Fork, probably below Garberville. + + +PLACE NAMES + +The first list of place names below was taken by Merriam from George +Burt in 1923. (See map 13.) It starts at Scotia, runs upstream to the +confluence of the Eel and South Fork, and then runs up South Fork as +far as Garberville. Many of the places indicated cannot be located +from maps and it would even be difficult to identify them on the spot. +Merriam seems to have driven by auto from Scotia to Garberville, marking +locations in tenths of miles. + + tah´-cho. Main Eel R. + + hah´-tin cho´-be. A stretch of land on the S side of the main + Eel extending from Scotia Bridge E at least to Brown's Mill, and S + from the river to the top of the ridge. + + kahn-so´-ti-y[)e]´, "under maple trees." A big loop of the + river 2 mi. E from Scotia Bridge. + + hah´-ting-k[=o]k. Jordan Cr., 2.2 mi. E of Scotia Bridge. + + hah´-tin cho´-be. The prairie on top of the ridge S of Jordan + Cr. An old Indian trail goes up there. [Harrow Prairie. Merriam + gives the same name for the prairie and the stretch of land above. + The stretch of land is probably a village named for the prairie.] + + ahn´-sin ken-tes´-be, "Pepperwood Flat." A flat on the S side + of the Eel, 3 mi. E of Scotia Bridge. [Pepperwood.] + + lah´-sa tal´-k[=o]k, "Buckeye Creek." Bear Cr., nearly 6 mi. E + of Scotia Bridge. "Used to be lots of salmon there." + + lah-s[=a]-se´-te. The present town of Shively. + + bis´-kahl chum´-me. A bluff on Eel R. where the river makes a + loop to the S. About 6.3 mi. from Scotia Bridge. + + s[=a]-tahs´ ch[=a]-lin´-te. An extensive gravel flat on the N + side of the Eel in the curve of a big loop in the river, 6.5 mi. + from Scotia Bridge. + + s[=a]-tahs´-be. A bluff on the N side of the Eel at the + railroad tunnel 6-3/4 or 7 mi. E from Scotia Bridge. Said to be a + rough place. + + ahn-sin´-tah´-be, "Pepperwood Flat." A flat on the S side of + the river 7.5 mi. E from Scotia Bridge. Place now called Pepperwood. + + ahn-sin-tah´-k[=o]k, "Pepperwood Creek." A small creek closely + followed by the highway, about 7.5 to 8 mi. E from Scotia Bridge. + [Evidently Chadd Cr.] + + kahs-tes´-be. Holmes' lumber camp, on S side of Eel about 7.5 + mi. E of Scotia Bridge. + + slahn´-k[=o]. Larabee Creek, entering the Eel from the E. + + kah´-li-cho´-be, "growing flat." At a place called Englewood, + a small settlement 9 mi. E of Scotia Bridge and continuing to + Englewood Roadhouse at 9.8 mi. The name is said to refer to things + "growing up" there. + + tan´-k[=o]s tah´-te (tan´-k[=o]s means _Equisitum_). A long + ford 10.5 mi. E of Scotia Bridge. It is a long gravel bar on the + N side of the river. It is named for the abundance of Horsetail + (_Equisitum_) found there. + + s[=a]´ cho´-te (sa means "rock"). A big rock projecting into + the river from the S side, 11.5 mi. from Scotia Bridge. [It appears + to be what is now called High Rock.] + + s[=a]-tah´-ting. A redwood forest and flat near the rock sa + cho-te and named for that rock. + + chin-tah´-tah. An extensive flat on the S side of the Eel from + the mouth of South Fork W, including Dyerville, 13 mi. from Scotia + Bridge. + + ts[)a]-vel´-be. An area on the S side of the Eel immediately W + of and adjoining chin-tah´-tah. + + lel´-lin teg´-o-be. The junction of South Fork with the main + Eel R. + + sin´-ke-k[=o]k. The South Fork of the Eel R. + + tah´-tung-i´-kut. South Fork railroad station. + + nahl-tsin´-kah (nahl-tsuk´-kah). Old Camp Grant. + + ·hles-yah´-kah (les-yah´-kah). Fruitland in Elk Prairie. + + s[=a]-tah´-be. Eel Rock, about 12 mi. up the Eel from its + junction with South Fork. + + tah´-cho. The main Eel R. + + nah-tah´-ting i-k[=a]. Dyerville Redwood Flat in the point + between the main Eel and South Fork. The name means "pointed out," + a descriptive term suggested by the geographical feature. + + lo-lahn´-k[=o]k. Bull Cr. + + kahs-cho´ chi-net´-tah. Schoolhouse Flat, 7 mi. up Bull Cr. + + s[=a]´-es-ch[=a]-lin´-te, "rock run out." On the E side of + South Fork 1/2 or 3/4 mi. S of Dyerville. + + sit´-se-tahl´-ko. A small creek on the W side of South Fork + about 1/2 mi. S of Bull Cr. [Evidently Decker Cr.] + + s[=a]´-es´-kuk, "on top rock." A hill on the E side of South + Fork 0.9 mi. S of Dyerville. + + lah´-s[=a]-cho´-te. A straight shoot of South Fork beginning + at s[=a]´-es´-kuk Hill 0.9 mi. S of Dyerville. Lots of eels there + in the spring. + + to-be´-ah. Schelling Camp Flat (lumber camp, garden, and + orchard) on the E side of South Fork beginning 2.2 mi. and + extending about 1/2 mi. to the S. [Evidently this is the present + town of Weott.] + + [Illustration: Map 13. Place names of the Lolangkok Sinkyone.] + + nahn´-sin-cho´-ke. The big hill to be seen on the E side of + South Fork 3 mi. S of Dyerville. + + s[=a]-ch[=o]s-te (s[=a]-cho-st[)a]), "vulva rock." A long + gravel bar along both sides of the river and including a redwood + flat 4 mi. S of Dyerville. Named for a mark on a rock resembling a + woman's vulva, cho´-s[=a]. + + che-[=o]s-cho´-te. A stretch of river 4.75 mi. S of Dyerville, + including a small but good redwood flat. The name refers to foam on + the water. + + s[=a]´-boo-i-chan´-te. A big perforated rock in the river at a + sharp bend 5.1 mi. S of Dyerville. + + kah-tah´-be. A stretch along both sides of the river 7.5 mi. + S of Dyerville. It includes the State Redwood Park office building + and adjacent redwoods. + + ken´-tes-cho´-be. Myers Flat, a little over 8 mi. S of + Dyerville, including Myers Roadhouse. The Indians say this place + was never covered with timber. + + ses-che´-is-ke. A place 8.7 mi. S of Dyerville, above + ken-tes-cho-be. + + s[=a]-bug´-gah-nah´. A place 9 mi. S of Dyerville where the + river goes around rocks. [Evidently Eagle Pt.] George Burt once + lived here and his son Guy Burt was born here. + + tub´-bel-chin´-tah ch[=a]-gel-k[=o]k. A small creek 10 mi. S + of Dyerville, entering South Fork from the E just S of a bend in + the river. [Evidently Bridge Cr.] + + s[=o]l´-te-che. A place at the mouth of Elk Cr., on the E side + of South Fork. Includes the eastern part of Bolling Grove. + + s[=o]l-te-k[=o]k. Elk Creek, entering South Fork from the E in + Bolling Grove, 10.3 mi. S of Dyerville. + + sen-t[)e]^{ch}-be. A rock in the river at a small bend 11.2 + mi. S of Dyerville. + + ni´-te´-t[)e] el-lah´-t[)e], "dog drowned" ... A place where a + new bridge is now (1923) being built across South Fork, 12 mi. S of + Dyerville. [Evidently this refers to the bridge at Blair Grove.] + + suk´-ke-ch[=o]s kah´-me, "eagle pawn." A big flat on the W + side of the river 12.5 mi. S of Dyerville. + + chah´-ni-che´. Another large flat on the W side of the river, + 13.5 mi. from Dyerville. + + sah-nah´-k[=o]k. Salmon Cr., entering South Fork from the W + nearly opposite Miranda. + + kahs´-cho-boo´-ah´-me. This was a small settlement in a flat + at Miranda, 14.5 mi. S of Dyerville. + + s[=a]-nan-sung´ (·s[=a]-nan-tsin´-kah). Bear Butte, a + conspicuous peak on the W side of South Fork, about 18 mi. S of + Dyerville. + + s[=a]´-chen-to´-te, "water against rock." A place in the river + 16 mi. S of Dyerville. + + k[)a]-kes´-k[=o]k (k[)e]-kes´-k[=o]k). Fish Cr., 16.9 mi. S of + Dyerville. + + kin´-tes-tah´-te. A big flat, probably a mile long and very + broad, on the W side of the river, 17.5 mi. S of Dyerville. Just N + of Phillipsville but on the opposite side of the river. + + ket´-tin-tel´-be. A flat (now orchard and ranch) and village + on the E side of South Fork, 18 mi. S of Dyerville, at a place now + called Phillipsville. It comprises a fine redwood grove and a good + camping place. + + s[)a]-be-y[)e]´. A flat on the E side of the river 0.7 mi. S + of Phillipsville. + +A mile south of Phillipsville there is a good view of Garberville Ridge, +s[)e]-chung´-kuk, a fine ridge, part timbered and part open grassy +hillside, which slopes west from Little Buck Mountain, n[=a]-ah-ki´-kah, +the highest point, some distance back on the east. + + to-be-y[)e], "prairie under." A small flat on the W side of + the river 1 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + yen-nes´-be. A place 1.6 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + chig-gel´-e-yes´-ke. A place 1.9 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + s[)e]´-chin-k[=o]k´. A small stream probably 1.2 mi. S of + Phillipsville. A possibility of error here. If the location is + correct, the stream is probably Ohman Cr. + + s[)e]^{hl}-ki´-k[=o]k. A creek 2.1 mi. S of Phillipsville. The + preceding location is probably an error and this is Ohman Cr. + + s[)e]-ki´-ke. The land S of s[)e]^{hl}-ki´-k[=o]k Creek, + reaching to 2.5 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + s[)e]-tes´-k[=o]k, "hard rock creek." Rocky Glen Cr., 2.5 mi. + S of Phillipsville. + + ki-tes´-be, "hard brush." A place 2.9 mi. S of Phillipsville. + There is a small ranch and orchard there now (1923). + + chan-tan-che´. A place a little more than 3 mi. S of + Phillipsville. There are two big rocks and a creek there. + + s[)e]-to´-be. A big rock facing a high bluff 4.3 mi. S of + Phillipsville. + + s[=a]-ken-nes´, "talking rock." A big rock on a creek on the W + side of the river, 5.6 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + tuk´-ke-tahk. A beautiful open and partly wooded hill on the W + side of the river 6 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + tuk´-[)a]-tah´-be. A place on the E side of the river 6 mi. S + of Phillipsville. Named from tuk´-ke-tahk hill. + + tahs-ki´-k[=o]k, "white flag creek." Dean Canyon Cr., 6.4 mi. + S of Phillipsville. + + tahs-ki´-ke. Village at the mouth of tahs-ki´-k[=o]k creek. It + belongs to the To-kub´-be tribe. + + to´-che-be. A flat on the W side of the river 7.8 mi. S of + Phillipsville. + + bus´-ken-nes´, "cliff talking." A cliff or bluff opposite + to´-che-be. + + stuk´-kan-no´-be. A big semicircular grassy flat on the E side + of the river beginning about 8 mi. S of Phillipsville. The present + town of Redway. + + ahn´-chin-tah´-k[=o]k. Redwood Cr. + + se´-ken-t[)e]^{ch}-t[)e]. A place 9.5 mi. S of Phillipsville. + + sah-nah´-che-chel´-le. A place and creek 9.7 mi. S of + Phillipsville. + + bus-ki´-cho. A white bluff on the road 10 mi. S of + Phillipsville. + + k[=o]s-kun-tes´-kah. A sloping, grassy, open flat 10.3 mi. S + of Phillipsville. There was a To-kub´-be village here. + + ko´-se-che´. The area on both sides of the river 10.6 mi. S of + Phillipsville. Just N of the Garberville bridge across Bear Canyon. + + s[=a]-g[)e]´-ch[)e], "egg rock." A bold upright rock at the + N end of the Garberville bridge across Bear Canyon; 10.6 mi. S of + Phillipsville. + + ken-tes´-che tahng-ah´-te. A beautiful deep valley on South + Fork just SW of Garberville. The bridge across the river on the way + to Briceland is in this valley. + + si-cho´-kuk. A large village of the To-kub´-be near the site + of the bridge across South Fork on the way from Garberville to + Briceland. + + nahs-lin´-che. An area and village in a loop of South Fork a + few miles S or SW of Garberville. + + ken´-nahl-lag´-gah-k[=o]k (kan´-no-lig´-ah-k[=o]k). East + Branch of the South Fork of the Eel R. + + n[=a]-yahn´-kah. A hill on the W side of South Fork near the + bridge over East Branch. + + kahs´-cho-so´-be. A place and village on South Fork about 4 + mi. S of Garberville and 3 or 4 mi. from the highway. Not in sight + from the highway. + + kahs´-cho so´-ning-i´-be. A large redwood flat (Richardson + Grove) on the W side of South Fork on the Humboldt side of the + Humboldt-Mendocino County line. + +_West of South Fork Eel_ + + Bear Buttes sa-nan-sin-kah + Bear River chahn´-k[=o]k + Briceland to-cho´-be + Elk Ridge chi-chin´-kah + Mattole River mouth tah´-che + North Fork Mattole nahn-tsin-tah´-k[=o]k + Rainbow Peak tsa-che-be, tsa-bahng´-um + Rainbow Ridge tsa-bung-ah + Taylor Peak nahn-tsin´-kah + Upper Mattole kun-sah´-ke + +_On or near the Van Duzen River_ + + Alton chen´-n[)a]-che + Bald Jesse Mt. k[=o]ng-kel-tel´-kah + Bridgeville ahn´-sin-tah´-che-be´ + Buck Mt. nahn´-tsin´-kah + Carlotta yah-hlahn´-che + Chalk Mt. s[=a]-til-bi´ + Chalk Mt. Ridge n[)e]-chin´-tuk-kah, + n[=a]-chin´-t[)a]-kah + Fort Baker s[=a]-sh[=a]-be + Iaqua region k[=o]ng-tel-kil´-k[=o]k + Iaqua Buttes s[)e]^{hl}-kus´-[)a]-kuk + ("two points") + Larabee Buttes yah-kah´-nik-kah + (t[)a]´-che-kah) + Larabee Cr. slahn´-ko + Lawrence Cr. yah-tlahn´-k[=o]k + (ye-tah´-nah-ling´-k[=o]k) + Lassik Buttes tse´-nahn-tsin´-kah + Lassik Pk. ki´-chil-kahn-kah + Little Larabee Cr. so´-k[=o]k + Metropolitan yah-hlahn´-kuk + Rohnerville to-ti´-kah + Rio Dell ken-tel-cho´ (kin-tel´-te) + Scotia kahs-cho ken-tel´-te + Showers Pass s[=a]-ch[)a]-be + Van Duzen R. chin´-ne-kok (ken´-ne-kok) + Van Duzen R. mouth kin´-ne-ke + Yager Cr. yah-'hlahn´-k[=o]k + Yagerville chis-sis´-ahn´-tah + + +ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTES + +_Lolangkok Sinkyone._--The following notes on the Lolangkok Sinkyone are +taken verbatim from Merriam's notes. The informant was George Burt. + + The Lolahnkok did not fight much with other tribes but were + sometimes attacked by the Ch[)e]-teg´-ge-kah of the region north of + Round Valley [Pitch Wailaki]; and they think the Long Valley people + also used to make raids on them to steal women. + + Chief Lassik, whose name is often used in a tribal sense, + belonged to the Kittel´ tribe--a tribe reaching from Iaqua south to + Dobbyn Creek [Nongatl]. + + Chalk Mountain was only a few miles east of the boundary + between the Kittel´ and the Lolahnkok, and the Lolahnkok were + permitted to hunt there. + + _Shelter Cove Sinkyone._--Trees are felled by means of elkhorn + chisels called beh-cho, and stone mauls called s[=a]´tah--a very + tedious and laborious operation. When the tree has fallen, the logs + are cut in lengths by the same process. Planks are split off from + these logs by driving the elkhorn wedges into the ends of the logs. + After several planks have been split off, one below the other, + another set is started at right angles to the first. + + The dugout canoes are made of redwood logs dug out by means + of the elkhorn chisels. After the greater part of the inside has + been removed, fires are used to char the wood, which is then + scraped away by the chisels. This is continued until the walls of + the dugout are sufficiently thin. The fires are spread out thin in + order not to burn too deeply at any one place. + + Buckskin is tanned with deer brains, rubbed on with a stick + rolled in ashes, after which the hide is placed on warm ashes + until dried. It is then soaked and rubbed until soft. + + Wild tobacco (_Nicotiana bigelovi_) was always used by the + Bull Creek Sinkyone. It was originally found growing on burned-over + places and the people planted the seeds in ashes, usually on a + burned place. + + Buckeye nuts, called lah-s[)e]´, were cooked in a basket with + hot stones after the manner of acorns. They were then mashed and + kneaded into dough, which was buried for a while in fine sand. + + Wild Ginger (_Asarum_ sp.) is called tan-nas-bos´. It is good + medicine for pain in the stomach. The leaves are pounded and soaked + in cold water. The sick person drinks plenty of this water and + vomits. After a little while he gets well and is hungry and eats. + + A species of _Angelica_ is called s[=o]l. If a girl holds off, + rub s[=o]l on your hands, and if you get a chance rub her neck and + she will give in. S[=o]l is strong medicine. + + An aromatic _Umbellifer_ (species not identified) is called + s[=o]l´-che-but-tah´; the root, s[=o]l´-che. It is used for + purification and as a disinfectant. The root is burned and the + smoke wafted around to make the house more plentiful. It does not + grow on Bull Creek or South Fork Eel River but grows on Rainbow + Mountain and some of the other high ridges. The root is highly + prized. + + The Spotted Owl (_Strix occidentalis caurina_) is called + kah-ko´. He is a bad bird. If he flies close to a person, the + person will faint. + + The Dove (_Zenaidura_) is called bi´-yu. His grandmother was + burned to death. Bi´-yu was asked to gamble and replied, "I'll + gamble every winter; in spring and summer I'll cry." Now we always + hear the Dove cry in summer. + + The Red-shafted Flicker (_Colaptes cafer_) is called + mun´-chis-bul. He makes a rattling noise in the spring. He was told + that by doing this he would make the horns of the deer grow. He was + told also that when the deer became fat he would grow fat, but the + people fooled him for he did not grow fat. + + The Yellow-bird (_Astragalinus tristis_) is called + sin-sun-s[)e]-gahng-ti-ne tahs´-che, "to take away pain." If the + old folks were suffering, they would get him to sing to take the + pain away. + + The Kildeer (_Oxyechus vociferus_) is called ni´-til-yi´-che + from the necklace, ni-tal-yah, on its throat. In the long ago time + the water was very high and rough; big waves were coming in and + the people were afraid to cross in their canoes, so they got the + Kildeer to take them. He was a high person among the Water People + and could handle a boat better than any of the others. The people + talked about him and said he was the best and the only one to get + them across. So he took them across and saved them. + + The Coyote (_Canis latrans_), called sh[)u]´-b[)e], and the + Shrewmole (_Neürotrichus_ sp.), called ske´-cho, made the world and + the people. The Coyote had a number of children. The Shrewmole said + that when people died they should come back to live again. Coyote + said, "No, there would be too many people; when they die they had + better stay dead." The Shrewmole agreed. After a while Coyote's + children took sick and died. He wanted them to come back to life, + but the Shrewmole said, "No; you said there would be too many + people and you wanted dead people to stay dead, so your children + cannot come back." Then Coyote cried. + + The Raccoon (_Procyon lotor_) is called nah´-ke-gis´-chah. + A long time ago he was a doctor. He was able to talk to persons + suffering severe pains and could draw the pain out. He would dance + and sing and pull out the pains and fall back. One time he took a + flint out of a sick person. + + In the olden time the people tried to make the Elk (_Cervus + roosevelti_), called y[=e]s´-cho, out of the Cottontail Rabbit + (_Sylvilagus_ sp.). They put horns on his head and sent him into + the brush, but the horns stuck in the bushes and he could not move. + Then the people called him sti´-che and told him he must always + stay in the brush. + + The Bat is called nah´-t[)a]-bahn´-se. He wears a robe of bear + hide over his shoulders. A long time ago when the First People were + at war they wanted the Bat to make peace and they hired him to make + peace. The people told him to fix up good. He did so and said, "I + am the one who can talk big." He sang ho-w[=a]´-nah han´-nah. The + enemy agreed, and peace was made. + + Our people have songs for the Elk, Deer, Coon, Otter, Mink, + Bat, and some other animals. + + Slugs (_Arion columbianus_) are called nah´-tos. To prepare + [them] for eating, a slender stick is thrust through the head to + hold the animal easily. It is then cut open lengthwise on the belly + and the dark insides removed, after which it is dried. When wanted, + it is roasted in hot ashes and eaten. + + +BOTANICAL NOTES + +_Shelter Cove Sinkyone._--These notes are from Sally Bell of the +Briceland-Shelter Cove region. + + Acorns of the tanoak (_Lithocarpus densiflora_) form the + principal vegetable food. Hazel nuts also are eaten. + + Among the berries used for food are those of the Elder, + Manzanita, Blackberry, Thimbleberry, Strawberry, Huckleberry, + Salal, wild Currant and Gooseberry. + + The sprouts of a species of _Angelica_ are eaten raw in spring + and early summer. + + The bulb of the large red Tiger Lily is cooked and said to be + very good. The same is true of the handsome _Brodiaea_ sp. + + The seeds of the Manroot (_Echinocystis_) are roasted and + eaten. The seeds of _Godetia amoena_ are used for making pinole. + + Wild Tobacco does not grow along the coast and is not used. + + The Wood Sorrel (_Oxalis_) is used for poultices. + + Leaves of the narrow-leaf Iris (_Iris macrosiphon_) are used + for cord and nets and are much better than the leaves of the + broad-leaf species. + + +MATTOLE + +The Mattole occupied the drainage of the Mattole River below the mouth +of Upper North Fork and the coast from Davis Creek south to Spanish Flat. + +The village lists of Merriam and Goddard provide a complete picture of +the Mattole settlements but almost nothing is known of them aside from +this. In the Handbook Kroeber reported (1925_a_, p. 142) that "not a +single item of concrete ethnology is on record regarding the Mattole, +other than the statement that they burned their dead." Almost nothing +has been learned since that time, but Nomland (1938) has published a +monograph on the neighboring Bear River group and the culture of the two +groups was no doubt much the same. + +The territory of the Mattole lies wholly within the cold coastal +belt and consequently plant food was less abundant and no doubt less +important. The products of the rivers, when taken together with sea +mammals and other creatures caught in the ocean, provided an ample food +supply. + +When Kroeber published the Handbook (1925_a_), he lumped the Mattole +proper with the Bear River group. Nomland (1938) and Goddard (1929) +showed that these two groups were distinct. This division is supported +by Merriam's data and I have therefore retained it. + +Merriam appears to have spent a comparatively brief time among the +Mattole. The only informant mentioned for this group is a man called +Indian Joe Duncan, who is said to have lived at the mouth of the Mattole +River below Petrolia. Merriam seems to have visited the area in 1923. +His statement on these people, taken verbatim from his notes, follows. + + The Bett[=o]l´ or Pet´-t[=o]l´, as they call themselves, + (commonly called Matt[=o]l´), inhabit the coast region from Davis + Creek, about six miles south of Bear River, southerly to Spanish + Flat, which is about 12 miles below the mouth of Mattole River. + Their center of distribution appears to have been the Valley of + Mattole River, at whose mouth the four or five survivors still + reside. + + They say that before the Whites came they numbered between 300 + and 500 persons. + + Their southern boundary, Spanish Flat, is the northern + boundary of the Shelter Cove tribe, which reached thence southerly + to or beyond Bear Harbor. The Matt[=o]l´ say that the Shelter Cove + language is materially different from their own, and different also + from that of the Briceland Tribe, and that the Briceland language + is very hard to speak or understand. They declined to give the name + of either of these tribes. + + The eastern boundary of the Matt[=o]l´ I was unable to locate + exactly. They gave it as along or near the west base of Elk + Mountain Ridge, including the Valley of Upper North Fork Mattole + River. At the same time they gave the names of two 'tribes' or + bands as inhabiting the Rainbow Ridge and Elk Ridge region. The + Elk Ridge tribe they call S[)a]-bahng-kahng, the Rainbow Ridge + people S[)e]-tso´-ik (from S[)e]-tso-[=e]k, Rainbow Peak). There is + uncertainty as to the relations and geographic locations of these + bands. + + The tribe inhabiting the coast at Needle Rock they call + E´-l[)e]-tung. It is the same as the Shelter Cove tribe. + + +TRIBELETS + +According to Merriam's data, the people at Cooskie Creek in the southern +part of Mattole territory form a distinct band. This agrees with +Goddard's village data, and Goddard also assigns to this group some +of the villages on the upper Mattole. There is no evidence of further +subdivision. + + +VILLAGES + +Most of the information on villages of the Mattole is taken from +Goddard's notes. (See map 14.). In addition, there are a few data +recorded by Merriam. Below, Goddard's information is indicated by (G), +Merriam's by (M). + + 1. sitc[=i]b[=i]' (named from sand bar?) (G). On the S side of + Domingo Cr. nearly a mile from the surf. The county road leaves the + coast at this point. Plenty of signs of occupation but no definite + pits. + + 2. sesnoik[=o]', "rocks stand up creek" (G). About 1/2 mi. E + of the line of the surf, close to the hill through which the stream + in McNutt Gulch comes from the SE. A large quantity of cooking + stones and shells have been exposed by the blowing away of the + soil. Salmon run in the creek. + + 3. sesn[=o]t, "rocks stand up" (G). N of a large rock which + is 30 or 50 ft. higher than the surrounding sand. Another large + rock stands 300 yds. W, with a chain of rocks and ledge running + out into the surf. Many shells and stones mark the village site. + This village stood in the middle of a 2-mi. stretch of sandy beach, + which reaches from gotxenin to a mile N of this village. + + 4. sedjildaxdiñ (G). Close up under the hill. The wind has + carried away the soil, leaving a great pile of shells. Just S, a + stream comes down the hillside with only a gulch [La Rue Gulch], no + valley. + + 5. gotxenin (G). Known to white people as Mussel Rancheria. On + a bench with Peter B. Gulch at the southern end and La Rue Gulch in + the middle. A great quantity of shells were to be seen but no pits. + Joe said the houses were scattered along for nearly a mile. Many + rocks are in the surf. + + 6. ne'bitt'a, "earth fold" (G). On a bench 1/2 mi. long in a + cove a mile N of the mouth of Mattole R. There is a creek at the S + end, a small gulch in the middle, and a larger one at the N end. + These probably furnished water in winter. Joe said the houses were + scattered along the whole length of the bench. [It is likely that + this is part of no. 5.] Between 500 and 800 yds. from the shore is + a large flat rock (tciyatcise) occupied by sea lions. The Indians + used to swim to it and club the sea lions to death. They kept a + fire going near a rock on shore to warm themselves afterward. + + 7. seb[=i]ye (G). Perched on the steep mountainside just N of + the mouth of the Mattole R. At the southern end two pits could be + made out in the weeds. Slides had covered or taken away most of the + evidences of occupation. The trail was evident and pieces of lumber + were still lying about. The village was not burned, according to + Joe. The burying place is 100 yds. N on a separate bench of the + same mountainside. + + s[)a]-be´-ah (M). On the ocean beach 1 mi. N of the mouth of + the Mattole. + + Goddard and Merriam do not give quite the same location for + these villages but Merriam's description is vague and the names are + evidently the same. + + [Illustration: Map 14. Villages and tribelets of the Mattole.] + + 8. beken[=o]'adiñ (G). This was 300 yds. S of the mouth of + the Mattole R. and 100 yds E of the present surf line. There is an + elevation of broken shells and other refuse on the sandy beach. Joe + Duncan remembers seeing the village when it was inhabited. + + 9. lasaidûk (G). On the sand of the beach 1/3 mi. S of the + mouth of Mattole R., the second village S of there. The wind has + blown the sand and soil away exposing the shell fragments. + + 10. dzindiñ (G). By the mouth of a small stream 3/4 mi. S of + the mouth of the Mattole R. + + 11. sastecdiñ (G). On a small bench N of a little stream a + mile S of the mouth of the Mattole R. Fragments of shells were to + be seen. + + 12. senalindiñ (G). About a mile and a half S of the mouth of + the Mattole R.; on a small flat with a point of land S of it and a + rocky bluff to the E. Broken shells are to be seen. There are now a + hut and corral on this flat. The point S, a part of Punta Gorda, is + called "Windy Point"; sevinnagintcidin is the Indian name. + + 13. kailistc[=i] (G). A flat of 3 or 4 ac. immediately N of + the mouth of Four-mile Cr., about 2-1/2 mi. S of the mouth of the + Mattole R. + + 14. saitc[=i]bi^{=e=} (G). On a bench on the coast S of a bold + headland. A small stream here [Lion Gulch] has a large delta of + gravel. This was the southernmost of the villages of the Mattole R. + tribelet. A house and barn said to belong to John Mackey are on a + higher bench. + + 15. bitc[=i]b[=i]' (G). On the N side of Cooskie Cr. (called + k[=u]sk[=i]c by the Indians), 1/4 mi. from its mouth. Unlike + most such streams, this one has something of a valley behind the + bordering sea wall, through a gap in which it reaches the ocean. + Salmon enter it. This was the northernmost village of the Cooskie + tribelet. + + koos-ke (ko^{ch}kshe) (M). A very large band and village + ("hundreds of people") formerly on Cooskie Cr. on or near the coast + 2-1/2 mi. SE of Punta Gorda Lighthouse. Joe Duncan said these were + the most warlike people of the region. + + 16. dec[=i] (G). On a large flat in a cove on the coast, + immediately N of Spanish Flat. A row of shallow but evident pits + are to be seen 200 yds. S of the northern end of the flat. + + 17. y[=i]nak[=i] (y[=i]natc[=i]) (G). On a flat, called + Spanish Flat, 3/4 mi. long and 300 yds. wide between the ocean and + the terrace. It has a creek at its southern end (Spanish Cr.), + with a large deposit of gravel which has almost entirely buried a + group of buildings. Plenty of evidence of Indian occupation but no + decided pits. It is said to have been a very large village. The + men of this village were killed by a band of white men who came + down from the mouth of the Mattole R., which they had likewise + occupied. An Indian ran down the coast to give warning but arrived + too late. The women also were killed some years later. + + 18. seyetc[=i] (G). On a bench at the W end of a flat on the N + side of the Mattole R. about a mile from its mouth. + + 19. sedanadaaib[=i]^{=e=} (G). On the E end of the same flat + on which seyetc[=i] is situated. The site is now said to have been + washed away. + + 20. daxdeginkatik (G). On a rocky timbered point which is an + extension of the hills N of the Mattole R. This point is 25 ft. + higher than the main flat, called nestik. Several indistinct pits + are still to be seen. The Goff buildings are close by and occupy + part of the village site. This flat was plowed for the Indians in + 186..(?). There is water in a gulch W (Jim Goff Gulch). + + nes-te´-be (M). On the present Goff Ranch on a bench on the N + side of the Mattole R., about 3 mi. upstream from the ocean. + + The names are different but the locations are identical, so + these are no doubt the same village. + + 21. daaib[=i]^{=e=} (G). On the SW part of the large flat W of + Petrolia, on the S side of the river. It was here that the Indians + settled when they came back from the reservation. + + seb´-bin-ne bug´-gah-be (M). An acorn camp on the S side of + the Mattole R. a little below the present Hanson place, 3 mi. from + the mouth of the river. + + The locations for these two villages are the same but the + descriptions are obviously different. It may be that this was + an acorn camp in pre-white times and was subsequently used as a + village site when the preferred land had been taken by the settlers. + + 22. bisyet'ob[=i]^{=e=}, "slide place" (G). On a point on the + N side of the Mattole R. W of Petrolia, overlooking Wright's place. + Buckeye and peppernut trees are growing there. It has fine exposure + toward the S. There are pits still to be seen. + + 23. tcegiltcexb[=i]^{=e=} (G). On the E bank of the North + Fork of the Mattole R.; the site is now included in the village of + Petrolia. It is said to have been a large village. + + 24. s[=o]Lkaiye (G). On a large flat on the W side of the + North Fork of the Mattole, E of the road to Ferndale. A white man's + house, on a higher flat near the creek, has been burned. It was + here the Indian village stood. + + 25. djetxeniñ (G). On the N side of the North Fork of the + Mattole just W of a creek flowing into it from the N. It is at the + western end of a long crooked canyon. Under a point were five very + large distinct pits. There were evidences of occupation on the + point above (the creek is called Wild Goose Cr.?). + + 26. djinsibbai, "elbow" (G). In the bed of the North Fork of + McNutt Gulch. The inhabitants of sitc[=i]cb[=i] (no. 1) camped here + in summer to hunt. Timber and brush. + + 27. djibbedaxtûkkab[=i]^{=e=} (G). On a point on the S side of + North Fork of Mattole R. Opposite djetxeniñ. Joe saw people living + here when he ran away from the white man who was taking him away + for a slave. + + 28. natsinnadaat (G). At the junction of two streams which + make up the North Fork of the Mattole (North Fork Mattole and East + Branch, North Fork Mattole). The stream valleys are wide. The + northern one (North Fork Mattole) is badly washed out, as is also + the main valley of the combined streams. A group of ranch buildings + belonging to Si Minor now occupies the village site, and Billy Wood + once lived there. There was a pit on the W side of the stream from + the N and two pits on the N side of the main stream 1/4 mi. below + the junction. + + 29. sedjegûnk[=o][-l]diñ, "right angle" (?) (G). On a flat on + the N side of the Mattole R. E of the bridge. It is now occupied by + John Evarts. + + 30. djegaslinab[=i]^{=e=} (G). At the mouth of the creek + flowing into the Mattole R. from the N, 3/4 mi. W of the county + bridge SE of Petrolia (Conklin Cr.). + + 31. da[-l]oidiñ, "wild grape place" (?) (G). At the mouth of + a creek (Indian Cr.) flowing into the Mattole R. from the SE at + the northern end of a flat nearly a mile long. Saw what may have + been pits, one on each side of the road by the duck pond near the + buildings belonging to Cummings. This was the northernmost village + of the Cooskie tribelet. + + 32. djan[=o]ldin (G). On a bench 1/8 mi. long and 200 yds. + wide on the E side of Mattole R., which here flows N. It is at the + ford. + + 33. saiq[=o]tLûndiñ (G). On a long flat bordering the eastern + side of the Mattole R. Joe said the village was at the southern end + of the flat, which is now owned by Lee Minor. + + 34. g[=o]danindjaib[=i] (G). Just E of the mouth of Squaw Cr., + a large stream flowing into the Mattole R. from the S. The regular + inhabitants were joined by others, who camped here to gather acorns. + + 35. n[=o]willeneb[=i] (G). On a large flat on the E side of + Mattole R. upstream from the mouth of Squaw Cr. Exact location of + village uncertain. The name may be that of the section, not of the + particular village. + + 36. g[=o]nsakke (G). A large flat through which the Mattole R. + flows toward the NW. Roscoe lives on the N side. Exact location of + the village is uncertain. + + 37. L[=o]itsiske (G). On a flat on the E side of the Mattole + R. The river is here no distance from the road. "Joe got very angry + when I wanted to look for pits." + + 38. [=i]kediñ, "foot place" (G). On the N side of a small + stream flowing into the Mattole R. from the E, at the SE side of + a flat. There are two deep pits and several, less deep, on the E + side of the wagon road. A large group of buildings are on a higher + flat SE. There is a large flat on the W side of the river also. The + whites killed all of the inhabitants while they were fishing for + eels. + + 39. [-l][=i]gûcLûndiñ, "snakes many place" (G). Probably on + the W side of the river where there is a large flat around which + the river flows, keeping near the high bank on the E. The road runs + along the eastern side of the river and climbs a considerable grade + at the N. + + 40. [-l][=o]n[=i]tc[=i], "middle of prairie" (G). On the S + end of a flat on the E side of the Mattole R. Fifteen Indians were + killed here by white people. + + 41. n[=o]wilkediñ (gacdûlyaidiñ, "like a necktie") (G). Said + to be situated between the Upper North Fork and the Mattole R. + + 42. djegûllindiñ (G). On the W side of the stream coming into + Mattole R. from the S close to the Humboldt Meridian (Honeydew + Cr.). Indians may also have lived on the E side of this stream. The + application of this name is uncertain. + +Goddard also gives the following summer camps of the Mattole, which I +have not been able to locate. + + djindillegaxye. A flat on the S side of Mattole R., near its + mouth. + + innaslaibi. A long level bench crossed by the county road N + from Petrolia, 1-1/12 mi. from that place. Indians used to camp + here to gather tarweeds. An Indian battleground. + + kuntcegilcannebi. Sec. 32, T. 1 S., R. 2 W. On the E side + of the county road. The section lines given by Goddard are not + reliable. + + sekexge. A sloping place on one of the branches of McNutt + Gulch. + +_Upper Mattole villages._--The following village locations were given +to Goddard in 1908 by the Sinkyone named Charlie. Goddard did not +visit them so they cannot be accurately located. I am giving Goddard's +township and range locations, but these were made by guess from an +imperfect map, hence they must be used only with the greatest care. + + de'tci'. At the mouth of a big creek (de'kok) flowing into + Mattole R. at Upper Mattole. Perhaps de'kok is Squaw Cr., mentioned + in the Elk and Coyote stories. NW 1/4, sec. 30, T. 2 S., R. 1 W. + + ne'nûnyadûñ. On the E side of the river 3 mi. above de'tci'. + There are two creeks there. This may be the village, and de'tci' + the whole Upper Mattole flat. Notes say 3 mi. from Mattole, which + is Charlie's name for Petrolia. + + k'atinta'. Above ne'nûnyadûñ on the Mattole R. at the mouth of + kutsai'kok. NE 1/4, sec. 33, T. 2 S., R. 1 W. + + tcûlgûnnak'e'. Some distance above k'acinta' on Mattole R. + + tcintcûsk[=o]dûñ. On a hill on the E side of Mattole R. + + tcûst[=i]m[=i]'. On the W side of the Mattole R. on a big + flat, S of tcintcûsk[=o]dûñ. No creek empties there. + + istannaladûñ. On a large flat on the Mattole R. No creek + empties there. + + setûggûttc[=i]'. On the E side of the Mattole R. at the mouth + of setuggukkok. Sec. 14, T. 3 S., R. 1 E. + + tceliñk[=i]'. On both sides of a small creek which enters + a larger stream near the latter's junction from the E with the + Mattole R. The valley of the river is wide at this point. A large + group of buildings is now standing on this site. "I rode to this + place in July, 1908, when hunting for Jack's place. The name was + supplied by Charlie from my description." Sec. 31, T. 3 S., R. 2 E. + + Lenill[=i]mi', "flow together in." At the junction of two + streams on the W side of the Mattole R. There were formerly many + grizzlies there, and the Indians were afraid of them. This was the + last village S of the Mattole R. Sec. 7. T. 4 S., R. 2 E. + +Merriam gives a number of other village names with rather vague +locations. No doubt each of them corresponds to one of Goddard's, since +both men used the same informant, but I have been unable to identify the +villages either by location or name. + + tah-tah´-ke-ke. On a small flat on the S side of the Mattole + R. about 1/4 mi. back from the ocean. + + tahn'-hr[=a]´-lah-be. At the mouth of the Mattole R. (on a + lagoon near Indian Joe Duncan's place). + + yes-s[)a]-cheb´-be. On or near the site of an old barn S of + the junction of the North Fork with the main Mattole R., near + Petrolia. + + e-nah-sal-li´-be. On a flat on Mattole R., 1/2 or 3/4 mi. S of + Petrolia. + + choo-wil^{ch}´-kah-be. On the North Fork of the Mattole R. at + Petrolia. The name tek-ko-li-be is also given for a village on the + site of present Petrolia. + + +BEAR RIVER + +This small group, occupying the entire drainage of Bear River and the +coast near its mouth, has been fairly well documented by ethnographers. +Aside from linguistic material, our chief source, a paper by Nomland +(1938), gives as complete an account as could be obtained at such a late +date. Although some villages are noted by Goddard (1929), Nomland, and +Merriam, they do not appear to have been recorded by any of the scholars +in a systematic fashion. The village count therefore is probably not +complete. + +The resources of the Bear River group are substantially the same as +those of the Mattole, except that the salmon run is smaller. + +Merriam's information on the Bear River tribe is limited but it helps to +augment the data now in print (Nomland, 1938; Goddard, 1929). Merriam's +informant among these people was an old woman named Mrs. Prince. She +came from Bear River, but at the time Merriam spoke to her (July and +September, 1921) she was living at the Rohnerville Reservation. She used +to visit her granddaughter, Ethel Hecker, at Scotia. + +Merriam gives the following brief note about these people. + + Nek´-an-ni´ ... Athapaskan coast tribe formerly inhabiting + Cape Mendocino and adjacent region from Bear River Hills southward + to Mattole River, and reaching inland (easterly) to the headwaters + of the Bear River. [Nek´-an-ni´ was] their own name for themselves. + + +TRIBELETS + +All evidence would seem to indicate that the Bear River people +constitute a single tribelet as well as a single dialect group. Even the +village on Oil Creek (village no. 7) was evidently in the same political +division; Goddard (1929, p. 291) says: "There was, however, one village +at the mouth of Van Duzen creek which was allied to Bear river both in +its dialect and politically." + + +VILLAGES + +Some villages are given by Merriam (M), Nomland (1938) (N), and Goddard +(1929) (G), but most of the locations are not very certain. + + 1. chal-ko´-chah (M). Name of the village N of the mouth of + Bear R., used for both the place and the village. + + tc'alko´ (N). Largest and most western village in the area. It + included the flat at the mouth of Bear R. + + Goddard mentions two villages as being on the ocean N of the + mouth of Bear R. -- [-l]'adAlk'AsdAñ and goldElco'dAñ. He gives the + word tc'alko as the word for Bear R. In Nomland's personal copy + of Goddard's paper (1929) she has written the word "tchankok" as + the word for Bear R. She gives the following explanation of the + discrepancy (1938, p. 92): "In checking words given by Goddard with + my Bear River informant, Nora Coonskin, it developed that most + of his information (gotten from Nora's uncle, Peter) was not in + accordance with hers. Upon close questioning, the latter told me + that her uncle preferred to speak Mattole. I checked Peter's words + with Isaac Duncan, my Mattole informant, and found this to be true." + + 2. s[=a]-cho-tung (s[)e]-cho´-tah) (M). On the ocean on the S + side of the mouth of Bear R. + + setcodAñ, "rock big" (G). By the lighthouse, a populous place. + The present-day lighthouse stands about 2 mi. S of the mouth of + Bear R. + + 3. chil-sh[)e]ck (N). On the site of the present town of + Capetown. + + atcAnco'xEbi' (G). Said to have been where the store and hotel + are at the town of Capetown. + + 4. chil-en-ch[)e] (N). Near the present Morrison Ranch. + + chul´-l[)o]-ko (M). This was the name of the village at + Morrison's, 5 or 6 mi. above the mouth of Bear R. + + 5. sels-che'o-ch (N). About 3 or 4 mi. up the river from the + Morrison place. The site is now marked by a large red rock. It may + correspond to Goddard's sEtcixEbi, "rock stand in the water", which + is not located. + + 6. seht-lá (N). About 7 mi. up Bear R. from Capetown. + + 7. ko-stah-che´ (k[=o]s-tah-che´) (M). Name of the camp on Oil + Cr. + +Each author gives some additional villages, which cannot be located. + + esta-kana (N). On the largest flat in the upper valley, Gear's + place. + + IstE=g=nadaibi', "madrone stands place" (G). + + klaht-el-k[=o]s´-tah (M). Name of the village near the head of + Bear R. (at least 15 or 20 mi. upstream). It was a large town with + a big dance house. + + [-l]'adAlk'AsdAñ (G). Where a schoolhouse stands on Bear R. + + tlanko (N). Above chil-sheck. + + +ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTES + +At low tide in the spring the Bear River people waded out to lighthouse +rock to gather the eggs of seabirds--gulls, shags, and others. They +would climb up a sort of stairs in the steep rock, wrap the eggs in +buckskin, and let them down with long ropes. + +The illustration (fig. 1, _c_) is of an old woman, about ninety years +old, from Bear River, sketched in the fall of 1921. + + +WHILKUT + +As stated earlier in the discussion of boundaries (p. 164) I have, +following Merriam's data, assigned the Whilkut different territory than +has heretofore been customary. In the present scheme they occupy the +drainage of Mad River from the mouth of North Fork Mad River to the +mouth of Bug Creek, the drainage of North Fork Mad River, and all the +drainage of Redwood Creek above the lower ten miles. The subdivisions of +the Whilkut are: Chilula Whilkut (Kroeber's Chilula) on lower Redwood +Creek, Kloki Whilkut (part of Kroeber's Whilkut) on upper Redwood Creek, +Mad River Whilkut (part of Kroeber's Whilkut) on Mad River above the +mouth of North Fork, and North Fork Whilkut (part of Kroeber's Wiyot) in +the drainage of North Fork Mad River. + +Goddard (1914_a_) and Merriam together give a fairly complete picture of +the organization of villages and subgroups of the Whilkut but aside from +this we have next to nothing in the way of ethnographic information. +They were evidently closely akin to the Hupa in both language and +culture. With the Hupa they form a dialect group as against the Tolowa +on the north and the other California Athabascan groups on the south. + +The territory of the Whilkut lies in the dense redwood forest of the +northern coast of California. Thus their economy was based primarily on +the produce of rivers, and this fact is reflected in the placement of +their villages. + +Merriam has left a relatively complete record of his visits to the group +which I am calling Whilkut and which he called Hoil´-kut or How´-wil-kut +and M[=a]´-we-n[)o]k. (Merriam uses various spellings.) His first visit +to these people was in 1910. The following account is taken from his +California Journals for September 15, 1910. + + Talked with several Indians at Blue Lake. The boundary between + the Pah-te-waht [Wiyot] of Lower Mad River, and the 'Hoil´-kut or + Ho-il-let-ha of Redwood Valley lies along North Fork of Mad River + near its mouth, between Korbel and Blue Lake. The Pah-te-waht I saw + today live on Mad River at Blue Lake (on south edge of town), while + the Hoi-let'ha live on the extreme northeast beyond the town and + cemetery. + +Merriam's second visit there was in 1918 and the following quotation is +from the California Journals for August 11, 1918. + + Sunday, August 11, 1918 was foggy and misty in the forenoon; + partly clear P.M. Took the early morning auto stage from Eureka + to Korbel, but got off between Blue Lake and Korbel and went on + an Indian hunt, landing back at Blue Lake without entering Korbel + proper at all. Returned to Eureka in afternoon. + + Went particularly to get additional material from the Redwood + Creek Indians ('How´-wil-kut´-ka or 'HWilkut tribe) who were living + in this region when I was here in September 1910 (see Calif. + Journals, Vol. 1, 90-93, Sept. 15, 1910). Tried to find O'Haniel + Bailey and John Stevens of Redwood Creek, and Stevens' daughter + Laura, from whom I got much information before. After a fruitless + search over the old ground, learned that O'Haniel Bailey died + several years ago; that John Steven is visiting in Hoopa Valley, + and that his daughter Laura is married to a white man. + + But after a while I found two old men of the same tribe, who + were born and raised at the Blue Lake rancheria 'Ko-tin´-net, the + westernmost village of the H[)a]-whil´-kut-k[=a] tribe. They call + themselves and their language by the same name, 'Ho-tin´-net [North + Fork Whilkut]. One is blind and both are old. The blind man's name + is Nelinjak; the other's Denbrook. They were eating breakfast of + fried potatoes, dried fish, and coffee in their poor old shack. + I got some good material from them and after some persuasion took + their photographs. + + The blind one said he dreamed last night that a white man with + a book was coming to see them. + + I got from them the names of some Pah-te-waht [Wiyot] villages + on lower Mad River and about Arcata. + +Merriam's third visit to this group was in 1920. The following account +is from his notes. + + About the middle of September, 1920, I visited the site of the + old Hoilkut rancheria called T'chil-kahn´-ting (or T'ch-kahn´-ting) + on the east side of Redwood Creek near the Berry ranch, about a + quarter of a mile below the highway bridge on the road from Arcata + to Willow Creek and Hoopa. It was then abandoned, the Indians + having established another village on higher ground about a mile + below, and like the old one, on the east side of the river. + + The old site is on an open sand and gravel bar or flat a + little above high water mark and very near the river. The living + houses were square--never round. The house excavations were + about two feet deep. The excavation for the ceremonial house + ("sweathouse") was sixteen or eighteen feet across and deeper than + the others, averaging about three feet below the surface. The + ground floor within was covered with large flattish pebbles. The + building had fallen but I was told that it had a low gabled roof, + with entrance toward the river (on the west side). Under the north + end and still plainly visible was a ditch or flume to supply air + and for a draft when starting the fire. The fireplace was in the + middle. + + The graveyard is on the downstream end of the same flat. + + The flat is in a forest of Douglas spruce, black and white + oaks, maples, tree alders, and dogwood, with a dense undergrowth + of hazel, spirea (_Spirea douglasii_), syringa (_Philadelphus + lewisii_), huckleberry (_Vaccinium ovatum_), and the wild lilac + (_Ceanothus integerrimus_). The "three-leaf" or "deer-foot" + also called "sweet after death" (_Achlys triphylla_) is common + throughout the shady forest. + + In the immediate neighborhood the large gray tree squirrel + (_Sciurus griseus_) was common, the big gray ground-squirrel + (_Citellus beecheyi_) was abundant, and a few red squirrels and + chipmunks were running about. + + Ruffed grouse, mountain quail, and many pigeons were seen; + also crested jays, robins, and flickers. + + A few days later I visited the modern inhabited rancheria, + nearly two miles below the bridge. It is on a rather steep slope + about 500 feet above the river. + + Among the Indians present were two very old men, the Wilson + brothers, and a half-breed named Ned Woodward from Blue Lake, and + his wife, the former widow of Nathaniel Bailey--with all of whom I + had worked in previous years. With their help I checked my former + vocabularies and added many words. + + At Blue Lake during the latter part of October of the same + year I found a number of Indians, mainly Hoilkut, and obtained + additional material, including village names from Ned Woodward. + Worked also with others, especially the Hoilkut Chief, Frank Lowry, + and his wife. She is a full blood with the characteristic chin + tattooing consisting of three broad vertical bars with a narrow one + on each side between the middle and outer ones. [See fig. 1, _a_, + _b_ for different styles.] A married daughter had three children, a + tiny girl and two boys--one of three and the other five, both big + for their age. + +Also of interest are Merriam's ideas about the position of the Whilkut +groups. The following excerpt, taken from his notes, is dated 1939, but +refers to a trip he made to Blue Lake in September, 1910. + + M[=a]´-we-n[)o]k [Mad River Whilkut] ... An Athapascan + tribe on Mad River, reaching from the junction of North Fork + with main Mad River near Korbel (where they came in contact with + the Pah´-te´waht of Lower Mad River [a Wiyot subgroup] and the + h'Whilkut of North Fork and Redwood Valley) upstream (southward) + for many miles to the ranch of a white man named John Ahlgren, + where their territory ended. This is on or near Bug Creek. + + It was told me by a h'Whilkut ('Hoilet´-hah) who stated + further that the M[=a]´-we-n[)o]k spoke a language so similar to + his own that he could understand most of their talk. + +The statement in the last paragraph comes from an informant Merriam had +in Blue Lake in 1910. Merriam returned to the region in 1920 and at that +time spoke to a member of the Mad River Whilkut group itself. Presumably +the village list given for that group is derived from the second visit. + +Merriam discusses the other Whilkut groups as follows. + + The Hoil´-kut or Redwood Creek Indians (commonly called + Chilula, Hwilkut, or Whilkut) were until recent years one of the + dominant Athapaskan tribes of Humboldt County in northwestern + California. + + Their territory consisted of the whole valley of Redwood Creek + and the adjacent mountains from a point on the creek 10 or 12 miles + above its mouth to Chaparral Mountain at the head of the creek, and + included also the North Fork of Mad River and a short stretch on + the north side of the main Mad River between Blue Lake and Korbel. + + Their proper tribal name as spoken by themselves is + Hoi^{ch}-let´-kah or Ho-[=e]^{ch}-kut-k[)a], usually slurred + to Hoil´-kut. They also call themselves Ho-[=e]^{ch}-kut + kew-yahn´-ne-ahm, meaning Redwood Acorn eaters. + + There are three divisions or subtribes, more or less distinct + according to the point of view: Upper Redwood, Lower Redwood, and + Blue Lakes or North Fork Mad River Indians. In their own language + they are: + + 1. The Ho-[=e]^{ch}-ke-e´-te (from Ho-[=e]^{ch}-kut, + "Redwood", and e´-te, "north"), the Northern or Lower Redwood + Indians [Chilula Whilkut], inhabiting the valleys and adjacent + slopes of Redwood Creek from its mouth upstream about 12 miles to + the Tom Blair Ranch at the junction of Minor Creek--a distance in + an air line of about 17.5 miles. Goddard thought this division was + the whole tribe and called it Chilula, adopting the term from the + Hoopa, Polikla [Yurok], and Nererner [Coast Yurok] Indians, who + however apply it in a wider sense to both upper and lower divisions + of the Redwood Creek tribe. + + 2. The Ho-[=e]^{ch}-ki´-e-nok (from Ho-[=e]^{ch}-kut, + "Redwood", and e´-nok, "south"), the Upper or Southern Redwoods + [Kloki Whilkut], inhabiting the valley of Redwood Creek from Minor + Creek (Tom Blair Ranch) up southerly to the head of the river, near + Chaparral Mountain--a distance in an air line of nearly 20 miles. + They also call themselves 'Klo-ke Ching´-ching-e´-nok, meaning + "Prairie place south." + + 3. The 'Ho^{ch}-tin´-net (or 'Ko-tin´-net), the Blue Lake and + North Fork Mad River Indians [North Fork Whilkut], inhabiting the + valley of North Fork Mad River from its head to Korbel and Blue + Lake, and separated from the other divisions by a continuous lofty + ridge 2,000 to 4,000 feet in altitude. At Blue Lake they had a + large village called Kaw-cho´-sish-tin-tang. + + South of the 'Ho^{ch}-tin´-net are the M[=a]´-we-nok [Mad + R. Whilkut], a related Athapaskan tribe inhabiting the valley of + Mad River from the junction of North Fork near Korbel, southerly + (upstream) to the Algrehn Ranch on Bug Creek--a distance in a + straight line of about 21 miles. The 'Ho^{ch}-tin´-net and the + M[=a]´-we-nok say that their languages are so similar that either + can understand most of the words of the other. + + The Hoilkut do not reach the coast, being separated from it by + a long mountain ridge, on the west side of which dwell two tribes + belonging to widely different linguistic stocks--the Nererner (the + southwestern division of the Polikla or Yurok) and the Pahtewaht + (the northern division of the Humboldt Bay Soolahteluk [Wiyot]). + + The Hoilkut say that the coast tribe they call Teswan (the + Nererner) owned the land fronting the ocean from Orick at the mouth + of Redwood Creek south to Trinidad and extending up Redwood Creek + for ten or twelve miles; and that farther south the Pahtewaht + of the coast and lower Mad River owned the country up to Blue + Lake--possibly to the mouth of North Fork Mad River--all of which + agrees with what I have been told by members of these tribes. + + The Hoilkut state that their lowermost (northernmost) + villages, Ha-wung´-ah-kut and No-l[)e]´-tin, were ten or twelve + miles up from the mouth of the river. Below these they claim no + territory. Above, they had twenty-three permanent villages. + + The language is uniform throughout Redwood Creek Valley except + for one or two slight differences of pronunciation. Thus the first + syllable of the tribal name as spoken by the Upper Redwoods is + Hoi´^{ch}; by the Lower Redwoods, Ho-[=e]^{ch}. + + +VILLAGES + +Most of the village names in the lists following were recorded by +Merriam or Loud; some Chilula and Kloki Whilkut data from Goddard's +works are added. + +_Mad River Whilkut villages._--All the names in this list were recorded +by either Merriam or Loud (1918), respectively designated by (M) and +(L). (See map 16.) + + 1. ti-keo-tchun´-tin (M). Village on the site of present + Riverside. + + mis-ken[=e]'huten, "bluff-?-place" (L). + + The names are quite different but the locations are identical. + One of them may be in error. + + 2. djin[=a]kh[=o]e-ten (L). Name said to refer to a prairie. + + 3. tolkai'e-ten (L). Name said to refer to shining gravel. + + 4. dj'[=e]ndj[=e]e-ten, dj'[=e]ndj[=e]-whot (L). Name said to + refer to a strong sweep of the wind at that place. + + 5. me´-kaw^{ch}-ting, me-ke´-aw^{ch}-ting (M). Village at Jim + Anderson's place about 3 mi. S of Korbel. + + 6. [=a]rtes-slandj[=e][=o]lin-tin, "grasshopper-?-place" (L). + Village at the mouth of Dry Cr. + + 7. ka-tahs-lah-ting, 'ke-ah-tahs-lah-ting (M). Village on the + S side of Cañon Cr. (in air line about 3.5 mi. S of Korbel). + + who'nt[=a], "houses" (L). Village at the mouth of Cañon Cr. + + 8. whotsdj[=o]t[=a]che-tin (L). Name said to refer to a low + prairie. The village is 3 or 4 mi. below Maple Cr., just below + Foster Cr. There were three houses there. + + 9. ts[=a]´-te-tis´-ting (M). Camp on Mad R. at Fala ranch, 10 + or 12 mi. S of Korbel. It was a camp for catching eels. + + ts[=e]-didis-ten (L). Village about 2 mi. below Maple Cr. + There were ten or more houses there. + + 10. til-chwah-hew'-a-kut, til-tchwa-h[)u]-ut (M). Village on + Maple Cr. about 14 mi. (9 in air line) S of Korbel. Large village. + + tilch[=e]h[=u]ërkut, dilchërh[=u][=e]rkut (L). Village at the + mouth of Maple Cr. + + 11. hotint[=e]lime (L). Village at the mouth of Black + Cr. The name is said to refer to a prairie near by, known as + hinukerchenditen. + + 12. yin[=a]lin[=o]whot (L). Village at the mouth of Boulder + Cr. Merriam also lists a village at this place but he does not give + its name or other information about it. + + 13. me´-m[)e]h (M). Village at Three Cabins on Mad R. about 3 + mi. above Maple Cr. On Tom Blair's Mad R. place. + + 14. Village near Mountain View, about 3.5 mi. S of Three + Cabins. + + 15. tseng-nah´-neng-ahl´-ting, tseng-nah´-neng-ah-ten, "rocks + across the river" (M). Large village at John Ahlgren's place on or + near Bug Cr. [This may be the village site shown in pl. 10, _b_.] + + 16. ituke-n[=o]le´-tin, "up-waterfall-place" (L). Village on + Foster Cr. The same name also given to a prairie half a mile up the + creek from its mouth; ituk means "up," also "east." + +_Chilula Whilkut villages._--The information on the villages and camps +of the Chilula Whilkut comes from Merriam's notes and from Goddard's +published material (1914). It appears that Merriam made a systematic +effort to check Goddard's material, thereby enhancing the value of their +combined work. (See map 15.) + +[Illustration: Map 15. Villages of the Chilula Whilkut, North Fork +Whilkut, and Kloki Whilkut (see also map 16).] + + 1. ho-wung´-ah-kut (M). In the Bald Hills N of Redwood Cr. + Northernmost and lowest village. + + x[=o]wûnnakût (G). Village probably situated about a mile + E of Redwood Cr. on a small flat S of a ridge along which the + Trinidad trail used to run. A small creek a short distance S, + entering Redwood Cr. from the E, would have furnished excellent + salmon fishing. A depression resembling those characteristic of + sweathouses was seen. Tom Hill's oldest brother used to live at + this village, which was deserted many years ago, probably because + of its nearness to the trail. + + 2. no-l[)e]h´-ting (M). Village on Redwood Cr. about 12 mi. + from the coast. The name means "falls." + + n[=o]lediñ, "waterfall place" (G). This former large village + remained occupied until 1888, when the Hill family left it and + moved to Hoopa V. The site is at the foot of a long glade which + slopes toward the creek nearly a half-mile distant. A spring N of + the village site supplies water. In the edge of the timber, which + approaches the village site within a few yards on the N, are two + large redwood trees, hollow, with large openings toward the S. In + these trees families used to spend the winter. During our visit in + 1906 we spent a rainy afternoon in one of them in which a fire was + maintained, the smoke escaping through the high opening in the side. + + The village derived its name and perhaps its existence from + a hole, or waterfall, a short distance up the stream. The creek + bed was formerly choked with huge boulders, causing a fall, which + was jumped by the salmon with difficulty. The fishing for both + salmon and lamprey eels, carried on with nets below the fall, was + excellent. Since the village has been abandoned, several of these + boulders have been displaced so a fall of only 3 ft. remains. + + 3. y[=i]tsinneakûttciñ, "down hill on" (G). Camp site W of + n[=o]lediñ, about halfway up the ridge W of Redwood Cr. The Indians + from n[=o]lediñ used to camp there to gather the acorns of the tan + oak, which are plentiful among the redwood trees. + + 4. L[=o]tsx[=o]tdawillindiñ, "prairie water flows down place" + (G). Summer camp about 1-1/2 mi. E of n[=o]lediñ and 1/2 mi. W of + the crest of the ridge. A hollow redwood tree used to be used as a + camping place. + + 5. tcitdeelyediñ, "dancing place" (G). Glade on a ridge + running toward the E near a branch of Roach Cr., a tributary of the + Klamath. This camp was pointed out from a distance and its exact + location is therefore uncertain. The Indians used to go there from + n[=o]lediñ in the summer to gather seeds and in the fall for acorns. + + 6. klo-tshim´-m[)e]y (M). Camp on Redwood Cr. 1 mi. above + no-l[)e]h´-ting. + + L[=o]tcimme, "small glade in" (G). A former village about a + mile upstream from n[=o]lediñ and 75 yds. E of Redwood Cr., where + it stood in an opening of about an acre. Obscure depressions like + house pits were seen on the N side of the glade near a stream + which provided drinking-water. A weir for lamprey eels used to be + built in Redwood Cr. near by. + + 7. ho^{ch}-tahn-ho-lah´-ting (M). On the E side of Redwood Cr. + above klo-tshim´-m[)e]y. There is some doubt as to its location. + + 8. king-keo´-'hli (king-keo´-h[)e]-l[=a]) (M). Summer camp on + top of the hill or ridge in Bald Hills about a mile E of Jonathan + Lyon's ranch house. + + kiñky[=o]lai, "big timber point" (G). Large and important + former village situated on the eastern end of a ridge above + Jonathan Lyon's ranch house and about a mile E of it. There is + timber on the northern slope of the ridge. At the edge of the + timber is a spring which supplied the village with water. Besides + the sweathouse site, seventeen house pits were counted. This + village was the home of the Socktish family, many of whom are now + living with the Hupa. The head of the family at the time of the + coming of white people was a man of influence and a noted warrior. + His name was KiLtcil, "crazy." His wife was a Hupa woman and + perhaps for that reason the family moved to Hoopa V. + + 9. senalmatsdiñ, "stone round place" (G). Summer camp for + gathering seeds in the glade on the S side of the main ridge E of + kiñky[=o]lai. + + 10. tesaikut, "projects to water" (G). Camp ground frequented + in the fall of the year for gathering tanoak acorns and hunting + deer by the Indians living at n[=o]lediñ and kiñky[=o]lai. It is on + the NE slope of the ridge W of Tully Cr. + + 11. king-y[)e]-ke´-ke-ah-mung´-ah (king´-ke-kaw´-mung´-ah) + (M). Village on the E side of Redwood Cr. at the mouth of Coyote + Cr. a little above ho^{ch}-tahn-ho-lah´-ting, and a little above + Lyon's place. + + kiñyûkky[=o]mûña, "big timber near" (G). This site was not + visited. It is said to be on the N side of Coyote Cr. below a large + rock. There are said to be house pits there. Tom Hill said this + was the village where the people who lived at kiñky[=o]lai spent + the colder months of the winter. It is unlikely that two permanent + villages were maintained by the same families. Perhaps the site of + kiñky[=o]lai is the more recent and it was formerly only a summer + camping place. + + 12. kitdiLwissakût, "fire drill on" (G). Camp used in the fall + for gathering acorns and hunting. Situated near the corner of the + Hoopa reservation in a glade sloping toward the S, near a spring. + + 13. new-wil-tso´-me-ah, "coyote camp" (M). Spring and summer + camp on Bald Hills Ridge. + + n[=u]wils[=o]lm[=i]ye, "ground in billows under" (G). + Summer camping ground near a cold spring at the head of one of + the branches of Coyote Cr. The Indians used to come here from + n[=o]lediñ. + + 14. ye-sin´-ning´-i-kut (e-tsin´-ning´-i-kut) (M). + + y[=i]sinniñ^{=e=} aikût, "down hill ridge runs on" (G). Site + of a former village 1/2 mi. E of Redwood Cr. and about 500 ft. + higher than the creek. It is S of the main ridge S of Coyote Cr., + at the western edge of a glade near a dry gulch. One pit was found. + It is said that Tom Hill's father lived at this village and that it + was not occupied at the time the white people came. + + 15. tsin´-tse-lah´-ting (M). Village below Stoffer's and below + ho´-tach-ting. + + tsinsilladiñ, "bones lie place" (G). Former village not far + from Redwood Cr. on a small flat where the ground shows signs of + having slid. Little Henry's family are said to have lived at this + village. + + 16. kittc[=u]namediñ, "its ear swimming place" (G). Summer + camp on the W side of the main ridge, about 200 ft. below its + junction with the E-W ridge N of Lacks Cr. There is a spring by a + Douglas spruce which stands by itself. + + 17. t[=o]'n-t[)e]-nahn´-ting (t[=o]n-din-nun-ting) (M). Old + village on the E side of Redwood Cr. Ned Woodward, who was born + here, tells me the village was on a side hill at or very near + Stoffer's. + + t[=o]ndinûndiñ, "water facing place" (G). Village site on the + sloping hillside about 700 yds. E of Redwood Cr. and 400 yds. N of + Lacks Cr. Seven house pits were found here. The guide, Dan Hill, + did not know of these pits, but located a village of this name + considerably nearer Redwood Cr. The Albers place, probably the + first settlement in this region, is just S of this village, on a + flat between Redwood Cr. and Lacks Cr. + + 18. tcwûñxaladiñ, "dung stands up place" (G). On the western + side of the main ridge near its crest. There is a spring in a small + flat. + + 19. ming´-kah´-te-k[)e]´ (mung-kut´-te-k[)e]) (M). At Fort + Camp at the mouth of ho-tah´^{ch}-ting Cr. (Lacks Cr.), between + Lyon's and Stoffer's. + + miñkûtdekeyimantcintciñ, "lake opposite side" (G). Summer + camp among the redwood trees across the creek from Albers' place, + opposite the mouth of Lacks Cr. + + 20. ho-tah´^{ch}-tin´-nek (ho´-nah^{ch}-tin-[)a]-k[)e] or + ho-nah^{ch}-t[)e]-n[=a]´-k[)e]h), (M). Large village or summer + camp right at Stoffer's on the ridge about a mile above (S of) + t[=o]s-kahtch-ting (Cold Spring) and approximately midway between + Bair's and Berry's. At Stoffer's, formerly Hooker's, there is + a place called koo^{ch}-mit-tah^{ch} or kew^{ch}-mit-tah^{ch}, + meaning "between the alders," but it appears to be a place name + only. + + 21. e-nok´-k[)a]-no´-mit-s[)a] (M). Former village on the + Howard place. + + y[=i]nûkan[=o]mittsediñ, "south door place" (G). Former large + and important village, often mentioned in myths and tales by both + the Hupa and the Chilula. Pits were found on a flat near the creek + about 1/8 mi. SW of the Howard ranch buildings. Other pits were + said to have been obliterated near the middle of this flat. + + 22. tl[=o]^{ch}-t[=i]'k-hah-lah´-ting (M). Camp at an old + schoolhouse 1 mi. S of e-nok´-k[)a]-no´-mit-s[)a]. + + 23. h[=o]n-t[)e]^{chl}-m[)e]´ (M). Camp on the E side of + Redwood Cr. above Lacks Cr. + + x[=o]nteLme, "flat in" (G). Former village situated on a large + flat on the E side of Redwood Cr. The village is said to have stood + where the farm buildings formerly belonging to Beaver are located. + Because this flat had been cultivated a long time no pits were + visible. + + 24. klo-ch[)e]-k[=a] (M). Village on the E side of Redwood Cr. + + L[=o]tceke (G). Village which stood midway in a flat on the E + side of Redwood Cr. near the stream. House pits were seen on the W + side of the wagon road. + + 25. klitch´-hoo-[)e]-nah´^{ch}-ting + ('hlit-choo-[=a]-nah^{ch}-ten; sit-choo-[)e]-nah^{ch}-ting) (M). + Former village about 3 mi. above Beaver's on the W side of Redwood + Cr. above Lacks Cr. + + Littc[=u][w=]innau[w=]diñ, "dust flies place" (G). Site of a + former village on a long flat on the W side of the creek. It is + surrounded by timber, but receives the sun from the S. Little Henry + was living on the E side of the creek at the time, and said it was + his father's home. + + 26. ki´-loo^{ch}-tah^{ch}-ting (M). Camp on + the E side of Redwood Cr. about 1 mi. or less S of + klitch'-hoo-[)e]-nah´^{ch}-ting, but on the opposite bank. + + kail[=u][w=]ta'diñ, "willows among place" (G). Said to have + been a large village on a small flat about 1/4 mi. S of the last + mentioned village. There were indications of 3 or 4 house pits. + Molasses' wife said there was once a round dance house in this + village, probably the same type as in the Upper Redwood and Mad + River country. + + 27. kuff-keo´-m[)e] (M). Camp on the W side of Redwood Cr. + across from k[=i]'-loo^{ch}-tah^{ch}-ting. + + 28. kail[=u][w=]tceñeLdiñ, "willows project place" (G). Former + village, which stood at the northern end of a long flat. Two plain + house pits, one of them containing stone implements, were seen. + + 29. sik´-king´-choo-ma-tah´^{ch}-ting (M). Given as about 2 + mi. below Tom Bair's place on the E side of Redwood Cr. Merriam + says he could not find anyone who knew of it. + + sikkiñtcwûñmitta'diñ (G). Village occupied in 1914. At the + time of Goddard's visit, it was the home of Tom, a famous blind + medicine man. + + 30. h[=o]s-t[)a]´-ch[)e]-m[)e] (M). Village or camp on the W + side of Redwood Cr. about 2 mi. above k[=i]´-loo^{ch}-tah^{ch}-ting. + + 31. ke´-nah´-hung-tah´^{ch}-ting (M). Former big village on + the E side of Redwood Cr. just below Minor Cr. + + kinnax[=o]nta'diñ, "Yurok village place" (G). Important former + village on a flat bordering Redwood Cr. on the E, about 1/4 mi. N + of Tom Bair's ranch house. Four shallow pits were found. A fight + with the volunteer soldiers occurred at this village, in which one + Indian was killed. + + 32. ke-tan-nah´-tah^{ch}-ting (M). Former village on the site + of Tom Bair's place. + + 33. ho-un´-kut (M). Former village on the W side of Redwood + Cr. about 1/2 mi. from ke-tan-nah´-tah^{ch}-ting but on the + opposite side of the creek. The name is nearly the same as that of + the lowermost village of the tribelet. + + 34. tah^{ch}-ch[=a]-nahl´-ting (M). Large village on the E + side of Redwood Cr. just below Tom Bair's, near the big barn and + sheep corral. + + 35. tahs-ung´-ch[=a]-kut (tah^{ch}-sahn-che-ting) (M). Former + village about 200 yds. above tah^{ch}-ch[=a]-nahl´-ting on the E + side of the creek. + +There are also a number of villages for which the locations are +uncertain. The following names are from Merriam's notes, and the +villages are situated on or near the Bald Hills Ridge between villages 9 +and 16. + + tahnch-wing-es-hon-ting. + + kahtch-wahn-to-ting. Summer camp. + + ke-wah´-ahn-tis-ting. Camp on the ridge at the line fence + between Lyon's and Stoffer's ranches. + + tos-kahtch´-ting. Camp on the ridge at Cold Spring 1/2 mi. + above ke-wah´-ahn-tis-ting. + + tah^{ch}mah-no-ah´-ting. Summer camp on Bald Hills Ridge. + +One more village is given by both Merriam and Goddard, transcribed +dah´-sun´-chah-kut by the former and dasûntcakût by the latter. They +both say that it was supposed to have been near village no. 31. Goddard +thinks that it was a separate name for a part of village 31 "as is +customary in this region." + +_Kloki Whilkut villages._--Most of the information on this group +comes from Merriam's notes. Goddard's account of the Chilula Indians +of Northeastern California (1914_a_) goes only as far as the first +two villages, which he maintains are part of the Lower Redwood group. +Merriam claims they belong to the Upper Redwood group. I have accepted +Merriam's version and these groups are rearranged on the basis of his +information. Goddard's Chilula Texts (1914_b_) mentions a few villages +of this group but no locations are given, so they have not been +included. (See maps 15 and 16.) + + 36. mis´-m[)e]h (M). Former village on the E side of Redwood + Cr. 1-1/2 mi. below kah´-kus-tah^{ch}-ting. + + misme, "slide in" (G). Former village situated near the creek + on the E side. Many Indians were killed here by the white people. + Perhaps that is why this village was not mentioned by some of the + informants. + + 37. kah´-kus-tah^{ch}-ting (M). Former village on Redwood Cr. + at the junction of Sweathouse Cr., whose name it bears. About 2 mi. + below Berry Bridge. + + kaxûsta'diñ, "Philadelphus among place" (G). Former village of + importance on a flat of about 2 ac., near the creek level on the E + side. Four house pits were found on the N side of the flat and four + others in a row about midway of the flat. Two other pits, one of + them near the creek, were probably sweathouses. The flat is called + "Sweathouse Flat" by white people. This village is considered by + the Hupa the last of the villages of the x[=o]ilkûty[=i]dexoi, + or Chilula. It was the last toward the S from which Indians were + allowed to witness the Hupa dances. The Chilula also seem to accept + this as their boundary. + + 38. t'chil-kahn´-ting (t'ch^{[-l]}-kahn´-ting; + chis-kahn´-ting) (M). Village on the E side of Redwood Cr. just + under the Berry ranch and about 1/4 mi. below the old covered + bridge near Berry's. The village is now moved to a higher point on + the high slope 1/2 mi. farther S. + + 39. e-nuk´-k[)a]-cheng´-tish-ting (M). Former village where + the Berry ranch house now stands, on the high ground E of Redwood + Cr. Bridge. + + 40. es-tish´-chem´-m[)e]h (M). Former village on the E side of + Redwood Cr. about 4 mi. above Berry Bridge. + + 41. tsin´-tes-'ki´-m[)e]h (M). Village on the E side of + Redwood Cr. a little below mes-t[)a]-tim´-teng. + + 42. mes-t[)a]-tim´-teng (M). Former village on the E side of + Redwood Cr. above es-tish´-chem´-m[)e]h. + + 43. tah-nah´-nah-kut (M). Village on the E side back from the + creek and above mes-t[)a]-tim´-teng. + + 44. chim-mah´-non´-ah-kut (M). Former village on the E side of + Redwood Cr. at Bonny Cragan's ranch. + + 45. ni´-is-'kwahl´-l[)a]-kut (M). Former village at the head + of Redwood Cr. The last and southernmost village of the group. A + view of the territory here is shown in pl. 10, _d_. + +Merriam lists for this group five other villages, which could not be +located. Presumably they are in correct sequence between village no. 44 +and village no. 45. + + ts[=a]´-nah-ti´-[)a]-kut. Village on the E side of Redwood Cr. + far up, near Chaparral Mt. + + 'klesh-mah´-kut. Former village on the ridge on the E side of + Redwood Cr. + + m[=a]´-m[=a]-[)a]-kut. Former big village on m[=a]´-ma-kut + creek. + + 'klew-taw-m[)e]-ting. Former village on the E side of Redwood + Cr. + + nahs-kah´-nah-kut. Former village high up on Redwood Cr. + +_North Fork villages._--The information on this group comes from +Merriam's notes (M) and from Loud (1918) (L). (See map 15.) + +[Illustration: Map 16. Villages of the Mad River Whilkut, the South Fork +Hupa, and Kloki Whilkut. (See also maps 15 and 17).] + + 46. klokeche (L). + + 47. kaw-cho'-sish-tin-tang (M). Large village at Blue L. + + 48. me-k[=a]´-t[)a]-met (M). Village on North Fork Mad R. + between Korbel and Riverside (nearer Riverside). + + mik[=e]time (L). Name said to refer to being behind North Fork + of Mad R. + + 49. k[=a]-tsi'-[)a]-too (M). Camp just below Big Rock at + Korbel. + + 50. hoo-tso'-e-choo'-kah (M). Village (or camp) on the site of + the present store at Korbel. + + 51. ki'loo-whit´-teng (M). Fishing camp on North Fork Mad R. + 1/4 or 1/2 mi. above Korbel (where gum trees are, just below picnic + ground). + + 52. kis-t[=a]'-[)a]-kut (M). Camp for winter fishing on North + Fork Mad R. at Korbel picnic ground (Camp Bar) about 1 mi. above + Korbel. + + gestAkAt (L). Name said to refer to a deep fishing hole. + + 53. noo-l[)e]h´-m[)e]h (M). Fishing camp at falls about 1/2 + mi. above Korbel picnic ground. Only one kind of salmon can get up + these falls. + + 54. ts[=e]-in[=a]t[=u]lwo-ten (L). tse, "sticks," which were + left there after a prayer. + + 55. khaiyame (L). Name said to refer to an eddy at the base of + a waterfall. + + +ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTES + +The following note is taken verbatim from the Merriam files. + + The Nose Stick: The Redwood Hoi-let'-hah tell me that their + tribe never perforated the nose during life, but when a person died + they charred a piece of poison oak to make it strong, and sharpened + it and bored a hole with it through the septum of the dead person's + nose and then put handsome Dentalium shell money in the hole before + burying the person. + + The Tol-lo-wah of Crescent City and Karok of Upper Klamath + River (Orleans Bar to Happy Camp) were the only Indians the + Redwoods knew who dared wear the nose shell when alive--the other + tribes were afraid to do so. + + +HUPA + +The Hupa are the best known of the California Athabascan groups. They +live in the drainage area of the Trinity River from a short distance +above its mouth to a little above the mouth of South Fork Trinity and in +the drainage area of the South Fork Trinity up to the mouth of Grouse +Creek (pl. 10, _a_). + +There have been a number of papers published on a variety of aspects +of Hupa life but the main sources of general ethnography are Goddard's +paper (1903_a_) and Kroeber's Hupa section in the Handbook (1925_a_, +pp. 128-137). The Hupa are the same, in many ways, as the Yurok, so the +sizable literature on that group is also useful. + +The territory occupied by the Hupa differs in several respects from +that of the other Athabascan tribes. The elevation of their lands is +everywhere over 2,000 feet and in places rises to 4,000 or 5,000 feet. +Because of the elevation there is a good deal of snow in the mountains +surrounding the valley and this fact may have somewhat isolated the Hupa +from their Athabascan neighbors during the winter months, although it is +known that they were in close contact with some of the Whilkut. + +The fish resources of the Hupa territory also constituted an important +distinction. The Trinity is the only river in the Athabascan area in +which there is both a spring and a fall run of salmon. This resource +must have been very important to the Hupa. It is significant that in the +many intensive studies of the Hupa there is no report of any summer camp +away from the river. The Hupa were evidently even more firmly attached +to their riverine environment than were the other Athabascans, and this +fact may well have been due to the double salmon run. + +Merriam's estimate of the position of the Hupa, given below, is taken +verbatim from his notes. + + _The Tin´-nung-hen-n[=a]´-o or Hoopah._--The Hoopah proper, + who call themselves not Hoopah but Tin´-nung-hen-n[=a]´-o, occupy + the lower part of Trinity River and tributary streams from the + mouth of South Fork Trinity northerly to Bull Creek--a distance of + about 20 miles. On the west they extend to the summit of the long + high mountain range known as The Bald Hills (altitude 4,000 ft.), + which separates their territory from that of the Redwood Creek + tribe, the 'Hwilkut [Chilula]. On the east they reach to the lofty + mountain ridge culminating in Trinity Summit (altitude 6,500 ft.), + the northern part of which separates the drainage area of Mill + Creek from that of Redcap Creek; the southern part, the waters of + Horse-Linto and Cedar creeks from those of the westerly branches of + New River. + + Their territory, therefore, is difficult of access, being + protected in all directions by ranges of mountains or deep canyons, + while its western border is about 20 miles from the coast, easterly + from Trinidad. The entire region, except the beautiful Hoopa + Valley, 6 miles in length and a mile or two in breadth, where most + of the villages are located, is mountainous and most of it densely + forested. There are one or two small open stretches on other parts + of Trinity River, and a few grassy slopes on some of the ridges; + elsewhere the forest is continuous. + + The Tin´-nung-hen-n[=a]´-o are in contact with five tribes + belonging to three linguistic stocks, namely: the Po-lik´-lah + (often called "Yurok") on the north; the Kar´ok on the northeast; + the Athapaskan E´-tahk-n[)a]-lin´-n[)a]-kah on the east [I have + not been able to identify this group. According to Merriam's + map and according to his own testimony (Merriam, 1930) the Hupa + are bordered on the east by the Shastan Tlo-hom-tah-hoi; the + Athapaskan Ts´[)a]-nung-wh[)a] [Southern Hupa] on the south, and + the Athapaskan 'Hwilkut [Chilula] on the west.] + + _The Ts´[)a]-nung-wh[)a]._--(An Athapaskan tribe closely + related to the Hoopah.) The territory of the Ts´[)a]-nung-wh[)a] + lies directly south of the Tin´-nung-hen-n[=a]´-o or Hoopah proper, + embracing the drainage basin of South Fork Trinity River from + Grouse Creek to the junction of South Fork with the main Trinity, + and including also the rather narrow strip between South Fork + on the west and the main Trinity on the east as far up as Cedar + Flat. At the mouth of South Fork they crossed the main Trinity + and claimed a narrow strip two or three miles in length on the + north side of the canyon where two of their villages were located, + Ti´-koo-et-sil´-lah-kut on the high bench opposite the mouth of + South Fork, and Me´-m[)e]h, on the site of the present Fountain + Ranch about 1-1/2 miles east of the other. Their western boundary + was the divide between the tributaries of South Fork Trinity and + those of Redwood Creek (a little west of the courses of Madden + Creek and Mosquito Creek). The eastern boundary was the deep canyon + of Trinity River from the mouth of South Fork to Cedar Flat; the + southern boundary, Grouse Creek and a line running from its mouth + northeasterly and following Mill Creek to the main Trinity at Cedar + Flat--thus including the Burnt Ranch country. + + The land of the Ts´[)a]-nung-wh[)a] is mountainous and + forested, and the principal streams flow in deep canyons. It is + roughly circular in outline, and of small extent, measuring in + an air line hardly 15 miles in either direction--north-south or + east-west. Nevertheless it seems to have been rather well populated + for there were at least a dozen villages--all situated on high + benches overlooking the canyons. + + Their language differs only slightly from that of the Hoopah. + + The Tsa-nung-wha were in contact with four tribes: + the Tin´-nung-hen-n[=a]´-o or Hoopah on the north, + E´-tahk-n[)a]-lin´-n[)a]-kah [Tlo-hom-tah-hoi] and Che-ma-re´-ko + [Chimariko] on the northeast, the Che-ma-re´-ko on the east and + south, the 'Hwi´l-kut [Chilula] on the west. + +The following account of Merriam's first visit to the Hoopa Indian +Reservation is taken from his California Journal, Vol. 2, September 5, +1898. + + The present Hoopa Valley Indian Reservation Agency is built + around a hollow square, formerly old Fort Gaston. In order to reach + the agency we had to ford Trinity River, here more than a hundred + feet broad, the agency being on the west or coast side. Purchased a + number of sahah baskets. + + The night before coming down into Hoopah Valley we camped on + Trinity Mountain where we found a colony of _Aplodontia_ [Mountain + beaver], the Hoopah name of which is Nea't-saas. + + The range west of Hoopah Valley between Supply Creek canyon + and Redwood Creek is 3,400 feet in altitude; in other words, 3,000 + feet above Hoopah Valley. This range is covered with a rather dense + forest mainly of Douglas Fir, more or less mixed on the warmer + slope with Ponderosa and Sugar Pines and Black, White, and Live + Oaks, among which Madrones, Chinquapins, and Cedars occur. + + On the slope east of Hoopah Valley the splendid _Rhododendron + californicum_ occurs. Here also two species of _Cornus_, + _nuttalli_ and the black-berried _sessilis_, were seen, and in a + gulch nearby we found the rather rare Lawson Cypress. On this range + at an altitude of 3,250 feet is a stone pile around a post said to + mark the west boundary of Hoopah Reservation. + + On this same range the coast Plume Fern is common and + the ground over a considerable area is carpeted with delicate + _Vancouveria hexandra_. + + At Redwood Creek we saw the beautiful ringed tail of a + _Bassariscus_, which animal is said to be common here. + + The Redwood (_Sequoia sempervirens_) common along the coast + pushes up Redwood River to a point about two miles below the Bair + ranch. The man at the ranch, W. F. Boyce, told me that during + the previous year he had trapped in the region 32 Black Bear, 21 + Coyotes, numerous Wildcats, 3 Panthers, and one Badger, besides + killing any number of deer. Other mammals said to occur here in + addition to Deer are Gray Fox, Otter, Fisher, Marten, Mink, big + and little Skunks (_Mephitis_ and _Spilogale_) in addition to the + Ring-tail _Bassariscus_, here called kil-how'^{ch}. + + One of the commonest trees in Redwood Valley is the Tan Oak + (_Lithocarpus densiflora_), the bark of which is used for tanning. + Madrones also are common, many of them four feet or more in + diameter. + + The rare Cypress (_Chamaecyparis lawsoniana_) also occurs here + but Douglas Fir is not only the dominant tree but grows to large + size, thousands of them reaching diameters of five to seven feet. + + +VILLAGES + +Although the information on Hupa villages comes from extremely diverse +sources, there appears to be fair agreement among them. The basic +material comes from Goddard (1903), and this is for the most part +confirmed by Merriam and Curtis (1924, Vol. 13). In fact, Curtis' data +coincide so closely with Goddard's that they may have been derived from +Goddard's report. However, a few of Curtis' facts do not appear in +Goddard's work so we are probably justified in considering them primary. + +Besides these sources, there is a list of village names by Powers (1877) +and also a manuscript map prepared by Gibbs in 1852, reproduced here as +pl. 9; the original is in the Bureau of American Ethnology. Although +this map is not particularly accurate and although the village names are +given in Yurok rather than in Hupa, it still has special value since the +number of houses is given for each village and we therefore have a check +on the data presented by Goddard. + +In the following lists the sources are thus indicated: Merriam (M), +Goddard (G), and Curtis, 1924, Vol. 13, (C). + +_Natinuwhe Villages (map 17)_ + + 1. hon-sah-tung (M). Former village on the E bank of the + Trinity R. at the N end of Hoopa V. + + xonsadiñ (G), "deep water place." Near the beginning of the + canyon on the right bank at the N end of the valley. + + honsading, "deep pool place" (C). On the E bank of the Trinity + R. at the N end of Hoopa V. + + Powers (1877) gives hun-sa-tung and Gibbs gives okenope, + corresponding to oknutl, the Yurok name. Gibbs says there were 9 + houses in the village while Goddard shows 11 houses. + + [Illustration: Map 17. Villages of the Hupa and South Fork + Hupa (see also map 16).] + + 2. dakisxankût (G). On the opposite side of the Trinity R. + from xonsadiñ at the base of Bald Hill was a village, the site of + which is now entirely grown up to trees and brush. Goddard shows 7 + houses here. + + takyishankut (C). On the W bank, opposite honsading. + + 3. kin-choo-whu-kut (M). On the E side of the Trinity near the + N end of Hoopa V. and just below the mouth of Mill Cr. + + kintc[=u]whwikût, "on a nose" (G). This village occupies a + point of land on the E bank just below the mouth of Mill Cr. Eight + houses are shown at this village. + + kinchuwhikut, "its nose upon" (C). On the E bank just below + the mouth of Mill Cr. + + The Yurok name for this village is merpernertl (Kroeber, 1925). + + 4. cha-en-ta-ko-ting, "flopped out" (M). Former village on the + W bank of the Trinity R. a little above Socktish Cr. + + tceindeqotdiñ, "place where he was dug up" (G). This village + was a short distance below meskût. Its name refers to a well-known + myth (see Goddard, 1904). Goddard shows 12 houses at this village. + + cheindekhoting (C), "dug out place." On the W bank between + miskut and the mouth of Socktish Cr. + + Powers (1877) gives the name chan-ta-ko-da for this village + and its Yurok name is said to be kererwer (Kroeber, 1925). + + 5. mis-kut (M). On the E side below Hostler Cr. + + meskût (G). This village was on the E side of the river and + about a mile below takimiLdiñ. It "shows signs of once having been + occupied by many houses." Nine of them are shown. + + miskut, "bluff upon" (C). On the E bank on a bluff midway + between Mill Cr. and Hostler Cr. + + Powers (1877) gives mis-kut as the name of this village and + Gibbs gives eh-grertsh, corresponding to the Yurok ergerits, and + says that there were 6 houses here. + + 6. tah-kah-mil-ting (M). The head village of the tribe, + situated on the E bank of the Trinity a little above Hostler Cr. + Contained a large ceremonial house. + + takimiLdiñ, "place of the acorn feast" (G). A short distance + below Tsewenaldin on the E bank. It is known as the Hostler Ranch. + This is the religious center for the whole valley. Here there + still stand the xonta nikyao, "house big," and the taikuw nakyao, + "sweathouse big." These are said to have been built by the people + of long ago and to have sheltered the first dwellers in the valley; + but inasmuch as they were burned by a party of Yurok in the early + part of the last century, the statement is to be interpreted + as applying to the foundations only. At this village were held + the acorn feast and two of the important dances, and it was the + starting-point for the third (cf. Goldschmidt and Driver, 1940). + Goddard shows 14 houses in this village. + + takimilding, "cook-acorns place" (C). On the E bank a short + distance above Hostler Cr. At the beginning of the acorn season the + people of this village would gather a small quantity of nuts and + prepare a feast of mush and salmon, which all the Hupa attended. + The remnants of the feast were cast into the fire and the cooking + stones were added to the accumulated heap of previous years. This + is the present residence of the northern division of the Hupa, + known as Hostler Ranch, and the ceremonial feast is still observed. + A fishing weir was built in a long riffle near here. + + Powers (1877) gives hos-ler as the name of this village and + Gibbs gives ople-goh, corresponding to Yurok oplego (Kroeber, + 1925), and says that there are 20 houses here. + + 7. tsa-wun-al-mit-tung (M). Former village on the E side of + the Trinity in the middle of the valley. + + tseweñaldiñ (G). This was a large settlement on the E bank + about a mile below toLtsasdin. It is translated by English tongues + into Senalton. There are many traces of houses here, but the people + were all killed or scattered in the troubled times of the 'sixties. + Six houses are shown here. + + tsewenalding, "rock inverted place" (C). This was on the E + bank about 1/4 mi. above takimilding. The locality is now known as + the Senalton Ranch. + + Gibbs gives the name olle-potl for this village, corresponding + to the Yurok olepotl (Kroeber, 1925) and says there were 10 houses. + +_Tinuheneu Villages (map 17)_ + + 8. tol-skots-a-tung (M). Former village on the W side of the + Trinity S of the mouth of Supply Cr. + + t[=o]Ltsasdiñ (G). There are evidences of this village on + the left bank a little S of the mouth of Supply Cr. It has long + been deserted. A prison camp was maintained near this site by the + military. + + toltsasding (C). At the N side of the mouth of Supply Cr. It + was inhabited until about the time of the military occupancy. + + The Yurok name for this village is erlern (Kroeber, 1925). + + 9. ma-til-le-tung (M). In the upper part of Hoopa V. on the E + side of the Trinity, 2 mi. from the S end of the valley. It was the + largest village but not the head village, tah-ka-mil-ting being the + head town, ma-til-le-tung was the big boat ranch of the Hupa and + was named for ma-til, dugout canoe. + + medildiñ, "place of boats" (G). Just below xowûñkût the river + swings back to the W, meets a spur of the mountain, and then + swings back to the E, forming a peninsula. Here, cut off from the + rest of the valley, is medildiñ (Matilton Ranch). This village, + with those to the S, forms the southern division of the Hupa + people. This division manifests itself especially in religious + matters. + + medilding, "canoe place" (C). On the E bank of the Trinity R. + about midway between Supply Cr. and Campbell Cr. It is the present + settlement of the southern division and is known as the Matilton + Ranch. The southern division fish weir is built in the river near + here. + + mi-til-ti is the name attributed to this village by Powers + (1877) and Gibbs gives the name kahtetl, which is its Yurok name + (Kroeber, 1925). Gibbs says it had 28 houses whereas Goddard shows + 22. + + 10. ho-wung-kut (M). A village of the southern division, S of + ma-til-le-tung and 1 mi. from the S end of the valley on the W bank + of the river. + + xowûñkût (G). About a mile downstream from Tish-Tang-A-Tang + Cr. on the W bank of the river. Goddard shows 14 houses at this + village. The site is now called Kentuck Ranch. + + howungkut (C). On the W bank about 1 mi. below Campbell Cr. + + This place is locally known as Kentuck Ranch. This appears to + be the village called wang-kat by Powers (1877). Its Yurok name is + pia'getl (Kroeber, 1925). + + 11. tish-tahng-ah-tung (M). On the E bank of the Trinity R. at + the S end of Hoopa V. proper. + + djictañadiñ (G). At the S end of the valley where the river + emerges from the canyon is a point of land on the E side. This + village, known locally as tish-tang-a-tang, was situated on this + point. Just above this village Tish-Tang-A-Tang Cr. from the + mountains on the E empties into the Trinity. + + djishtangading, "promontory place" (C). On the E bank opposite + Campbell Cr. + + Powers (1877) calls this village Tish-tan-a-tan. According to + Merriam's notes the Yurok name for it is Peht-sau-an and this is + the name Gibbs uses for it. Gibbs says there are 9 houses here, + whereas Goddard shows 13. + + 12. 'has-lin-ting (M). On the E bank of lower Trinity R. 3 mi. + above Hoopa V. proper. This is the uppermost village classed as + Hupa. + + xaslindiñ (G). About 3 mi. S of the valley proper on the E + bank of the river at the mouth of a creek of the same name (Horse + Linto Cr.). Nine houses are shown at this village. + + haslinding, "waterfall place" (C). On the E bank about 3 mi. + above djishtangading and the same distance beyond the limits of the + valley. The name is preserved in Horse Linto Cr. + + Powers (1877) calls this village hass-lin-tung. According to + Kroeber (1925, p. 129), the Yurok name for this village is yati but + Waterman (1920, p. 188) gives wo'xtoi. This last would correspond + to Gibbs's wauch-ta, which is shown with an approximately correct + location except that it is on the wrong side of the river. This + village is said to have had six houses. + + 13. seh-ach-pe-ya (Gibbs' map, pl. 9). This is no doubt a + Yurok name, as are all those given by Gibbs, but no one else has + recorded it. There are said to have been four houses here. + + 14. wang-ulle-watl (Gibbs' map, pl. 9). Again this is probably + a Yurok name. There are said to have been three houses. + + 15. wang-ulle-wutle-kauh (Gibbs' map, pl. 9). This is probably + a Yurok name. There is said to have been one house here. Kauh is a + Yurok suffix meaning "opposite." + +Gibbs also gives a town called weitspek on the W side of the Trinity +just below the mouth of South Fork. There are said to have been three +houses here. Merriam asked about this village and its existence was +denied by his informants. + +_South Fork Hupa Villages (maps 16, 17)_ + + 16. hlah-tung (M). On both sides of the mouth of South Fork + Trinity on high bench ground. + + 17. til-tswetch-a-ki (M). On the W side of South Fork at the + mouth of Madden Cr. An old important town. About a mile below + chil^{ch}-tal-tung. + + 18. chil^{ch}-tal-tung (M). On the E side of South Fork 1-1/2 + mi. above its mouth. + + 19. os-tahn-tung (M). On the E side of South Fork 2-1/2 mi. + above its mouth. + + 20. 'hlit-choo^{ch}-tung (M). On the E side of South Fork 5 or + 6 mi. above its mouth. + + 21. klo-kum-me (M). On the E side of South Fork about 8 mi. + above its mouth (two above 'hlit-choo^{ch}-tung). + + 22. tah-choo^{ch}-tung (M). On the E side of South Fork about + 10 or 12 mi. above its mouth. + + 23. ti-koo-et-sil-la-kut (M). On the N side of the main + Trinity on a bench opposite the mouth of South Fork, about 1-1/2 + mi. below Fountain Ranch. + + 24. me-meh; me-a-meh (M). On the N side of the main Trinity on + the site of the present Fountain Ranch about 1-1/2 mi. above the + mouth of South Fork but on the opposite side of the river. + + 25. hoi-ti sah-ahn-me (M). At Hennessy Ranch, Burnt Ranch + (Post Office in 1921). + + 26. e-nuk-kut-te-nan-tung (M). At McDonnell Ranch, Burnt + Ranch. Name means "south slope place." + + 27. tin-noo^{ch}-tung (M). At Cedar Flat. Easternmost village + of the tribe, near or adjoining the territory of the Chimariko. + + +ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTES + +The following ethnographic data are taken verbatim from Merriam's notes. + + According to the Hoopah, as told me by James Chesbro of Burnt + Ranch, the First People are called Kit-tung´-whi or Devil People. + They used to fight and kill and eat one another. Later they turned + into animals. After the Flood real (Indian) people came. + + In early days the Indians used to get drunk from inhaling + the fumes of Indian tobacco (Min´-t[=a] itch´-wah) which by deep + breathing they would take into the lungs. Their word for drunk is + Ho-n[=a]^{ch}-w[)i]h^{ch}. The expression for "many people drunk" + is Yah, ho-n[=a]^{ch}-w[)e]^{ch}. + + The word for an old person is Kis´-te-ahn; for an old object, + Tah´-ne. + + There are two words for good: Chung-whoom for a good or kind + person; and Noo-wh[=o]m for a good thing or object. A bad person is + To choong-k[=o]m, "not good person"; while a thing that is not good + is To noo^{ch}-k[=o]m, "not good thing." + + Chin-tahs, "slow", is said to mean also "heavy"; but the word + given me for heavy is Nit-tahs´. + + The word Ho´-chit, meaning real or genuine, occurs frequently: + Thus, deerskin tanned with the hair on is called Ho´-chit te, + te being any blanket or toga. Similarly, the ordinary woman's + apron made of pine nuts and braided grass is Ho´-che ke´-ah; the + woman's hat, H[=o]-che k[=o]s´-tahn, or real hat; moccasins, Hoch + y[=a]´-che-tahl; the bow, H[=o]-ch[)e] tsitch-ting; the stone + arrow-point, H[=o]-ch[)e] tin-ti; Indian or wild tobacco, H[=o]-che + Min´-t[=a]-itch´-wah; the elkhorn box or purse for valuables + H[=o]´-che kin´-chah. + + The Hoopah say that their people did not use the nose-bone or + nose-stick, but had a name for it, which is Hun-choo whang-i. They + say these were worn by the Indians farther north. + + The women tattooed the chin, usually in three broad vertical + bands similar to those of the Klamath River tribes. Tattoo marks + are called Wil´-tahch´. + + Place names: All place names along the rivers were at one time + the sites of villages or rancherias. The village always takes the + name of the place. + + The name for house is H[=o]n´-tah or Hun´-tow; the ceremonial + house, M[=a]´-min sin-til; the sweathouse, Tah´-'keo; the menstrual + lodge, Mintch'; the brush wickiup, M[=a]´-nah-si; the brush blind + or hut for concealing the hunter Kew´-wong wil´-min. + + They say that they never burned the dead, but buried them + in graves dug exactly knee-deep by measure. The grave was called + Hot-yung ho-sin. The body was fastened to a slab of wood of the + proper length, and when laid in the grave was covered with the + belongings of the dead person and then with earth. + + While they do not burn the bodies, they burn clothing and + other belongings. But the Chemareko of Hyampom burn their dead. + + They believed in an evil spirit or Devil called Kit-tung´ hwoi. + + A peculiar custom was practised in extending a certain + courtesy to an enemy who wanted to cross the river but had no boat. + If a person having a canoe crossed the river, and his personal + enemy found the canoe, he would go and sit down near it and await + the return of the owner. When the owner came, he would back out + into the stream and then push the bow ashore at the nearest point + to his enemy, and the enemy would step in and sit down, neither + speaking a word. The owner would then paddle across the stream to + his own side, and the enemy would jump out and proceed without + remark. + + There were two kinds of doctors: the real doctor or shaman, + sometimes known as "dance doctor," called Kit-ta tow, and the + medicine doctor, who never danced, called Kim-mow-chil^{ch}-weh. + + Gambling Game: the common gambling game, Ke-now-we, was + played with a bunch of slender sticks 7 or 8 inches long, called + Hol-che-king. One of these, Hung ("ace" or "lucky stick"), has a + black band around the middle. The game consists in guessing in + which hand the opponent holds the marked stick. There are eleven + points or guesses. One stick is given up at each wrong guess. + + Small hailstones are called Klew-hahn min-nah from Klew-hahn, + "an eel," and min-nah, "eyes," from the resemblance of small + hailstones to the white eyes of the eel. Big hailstones are + Ke´-lo-ung-hot. + + An earthquake is Nin mah-ah tin-n[)i]^{ch}-chwit, meaning + "turns over on edge of world." + + Money: The unit of value, which we call "money," consisted + of the valuable kind of dentalium shells, long specimens of which + reached from the base of the finger to the base of the terminal + joint. This was called Ho´-che naht-te-ow or "real money." Small or + broken dentalium shells, from half an inch to an inch in length, + were called Mit-tatch, and were used for beads. + + Scalps of the great pileated woodpecker or cock-of-the-woods + (_Ceophlaeus pileatus_), called Kis^{l}-t[=a]-ke-'keo, also passed + as money. + + _Names of mammals and birds._--The Grizzly Bear had two names: + M[)e]-ch[=a]-e-sahn and Me-kwo ah. + + The Mountain Lion or Cougar is called Min´-ning m[)i]^{ch} + 'hl[=a]-til-loo, meaning "kills with his face." + + They speak of a spotted Panther of large size called Kit-sah´, + which has not been seen for a number of years. It used to make a + great noise. + + They speak also of a Water Panther (mythical) called + Ho-tsi´-tow, said to live in holes close to the water of lakes and + pools, never in rivers or on land. Its head and shoulders were + heavy and covered with long shaggy hair, but the hinder parts were + nearly naked. + + The Otter is called 'Kl[=o]k-e-te-til-le, meaning "he likes + salmon." + + The Weasel--and this is particularly interesting--is called + Klew^{ch}-m[)u]-hung, meaning "snake's husband"--a term doubtless + suggested by its snake-like form and actions. + + The Mole is called Min-ni´ [)e]-ting, meaning "eyeless"; the + Bat Haht-la nah-mut, "night flyer." + + The Porcupine is 'K'yo. Its quills, usually dyed yellow, were + used to ornament basket hats; and also to pierce the ears for + earrings. When a quill was stuck lightly into the lobe of the ear, + it would slowly work its way through. + + The common gray Ground Squirrel (_Citellus beecheyi_) is + called Ts[)e] 'ket-yahng-a, meaning "rock sitting on." + + The Jack Rabbit, oddly enough, is called Nah^{ch}-ah-tah + 'hits-'hlah-hahn, meaning "dry ground deer." + + _A Hupa ceremonial gray fox skin._--The skin was _cased_ + (opened along the hind legs, the belly not slit lengthwise). The + front feet had been cut off but the skin of each leg was slit in + six or seven strands or narrow ribbons about three inches long. + + The skin had been turned inside out and decorated in places; + then turned and left with fur outside. The skin of the hind legs + was painted deep red. The tail also had been slit open on the + underside and the skin painted with the same red paint, and a tuft + of pure white feathers four inches long was sewed to its tip. + + The most surprising marking was a double ring or belt band of + red and blue painted around the inside of the skin about two inches + above the base of the tail (and therefore hidden when the skin was + fur-side out). The two bands, each about half an inch wide, were in + actual contact all the way around--the anterior one deep red, the + posterior deep blue. + + The skin itself is of interest as being unmistakably the dark + northwest form of the species _Urocyon cinereoargenteus_. The upper + parts are very dark grizzled; the dorsal stripe from neck to tip of + tail is almost pure black and the tail is about an inch broad. The + flanks, inner-sides of legs, and undersides of tail are fulvous, + palest on the belly. The specimen is an adult male. + + _Sayings about birds._--Dove (_Zenaidura_). Called Mi-yo. + Mi-yo, the Dove, was a great gambler. He always gambled all winter. + Once when gambling someone told him that his grandmother was dead. + He said there would be plenty of time to cry next summer. So he + kept on playing. When summer came he cried for his grandmother. And + every summer we hear him crying for his grandmother. + + Hummingbird. Called Ko-sos. Ko-sos, the Hummingbird, was a + war bird. His bill was like a long needle. With it he pierced his + enemies. Once he told another bird to start from one end of the + world and he would start from the other. They did this and met in + the middle where they danced. + + _Notes on adjacent tribes._--Yin´-nah´-chin ("South People," + Chemar´eko). Extended from Hyampom northerly to Cedar Flat, + easterly along main Trinity to Canyon Creek; and northerly between + the high mountains that form the divide between French Creek and + North Fork Trinity River on the west to Canyon Creek on the east, + as far north as Rattlesnake Creek. (Previously learned from the + Nor´-rel-muk of Hay Fork, a Wintoon Tribe, that the dividing line + on the west between themselves and the Chemareko, called by them + Hyembos, lay along Minor Creek.) Language wholly different from + Hoopah. The Hoopah say that the presence of this tribe on Trinity + River west of Cedar Bar, and on lower New River, is a comparatively + recent intrusion. + + Klo´-m[)e]-tah´-wha ... Salmon River Indians. Ranges south + over summit to Grizzly Creek and headwaters New River. Language + wholly different. + + Ho-ning wil-tatch (meaning "tattooed faces") ... "Yuke" of + Covelo region. Round Valley. Also called Devils, Kit-tung-whoi--a + name applied to the First People, who finally turned into animals. + Language wholly different. + + _Geography._--There used to be a great fall in Trinity River + at a huge rock which stood in the middle of the river at Burnt + Ranch. Below the fall was a big pool and eddy, which at the proper + season was full of salmon. Everybody came here to catch salmon. + + Indians from several tribes met here and feasted and had a + "big time." Finally a terrible earth slide came down the side of + the canyon and moved the rock away. This destroyed the falls. + + This occurred during the boyhood of my informant. He tells + me that besides the Hoopah the Indians who used to visit the pool + below the falls for salmon were Poliklah from Wetchpek on Klamath + River, 'Hwilkut from Redwood Creek, and Chemareko from Hyampom. + They used to camp a little below the falls. + +_Hoopa Geographic Names_ + + Hoopa V. Nah-tin-noo + Main Trinity R. Hahn + Trinity R. "up and down" Hahn-nuk-ki + Bull Cr. Mis-tes-se ah-tung + ("sliding place") + Mill Cr. Mis-kut e-ta-e-tuk ne-lin-na-kah + (correct name) and Tsol-tsah muk-kah + (nickname from rock with female + mark) + Socktish Cr. Chan-ta-kot ne-lin-na-kah + Hostler Cr. Tsa-mit-tah ("between two rocks") + Site of present settlement Toos-kahts-tung-kah + in Hoopa V. + Campbell Cr. Tish-tah-ah-tung mu-mahn-chung + ne-lin-nuk-kah + Tish Tang A Tang Cr. Tish-tahn-ah-tung ne-lin-nuk-kah + Horse Linto Cr. Hahs-lin-nak-kak + Raccoon Cr. Se^{ch}-ki-uk-kah ("white rock") + Willow Cr. Ho-whah-chal-tung + South Fork Trinity 'Hlal-tung (at junction with main + Trinity) + South Fork Trinity Ye-sin-ching-ki (whole river) + Madden Cr. Tilch-wetch uk-kah + New R. Ye-tok ne-lin-nuk-kah + Forks of New R. Tsa-nah-ning-ah-tung + Ironside Mt. (east of New Tsen-nen-kut + R. mouth) + High Rocky Ridge (northwest Ta-se-tahn-ne-kut + of New R. mouth) + Trinity Summit Ridge Mung-kin-ne-kow-a-kut + Berry Summit Ho-e^{ch}-kut mit-ta-kahn + Redwood Cr. Ho-e^{ch}-kut ne-lin-nu-kah + + + + +POPULATION + + +SOURCES + +The earliest serious effort to estimate the aboriginal population of +California was made by Powers (1877, pp. 415-416), who arrived at a +figure of 750,000 persons for the entire state. This effort was followed +in 1905 by a more sophisticated attempt on the part of C. Hart Merriam, +whose figure for the state was 260,000 persons. Merriam's figures were +based on an estimate of the population of the mission strip, from +Spanish data, and a gross extrapolation from that to the remainder of +the state. + +The first attempt at population estimates in detail and with the use of +a variety of data was made by Kroeber (1925). The figure he got for the +whole state was 133,000 persons, and he still used that figure, although +with some reservations, as late as 1939 (see Kroeber, 1939, pp. 178-179). + +The problem has recently been reopened by S. F. Cook. In 1943 he +published an evaluation of Kroeber's estimates, based on essentially +the same data, and the result was to increase the estimate by about +10 per cent. In the last two years Cook has begun a more intensive +investigation, the results thus far being new estimates for the San +Joaquin Valley (1955) and for the Northern California coast (1956). The +upshot of these last papers has been to double Kroeber's estimates in +the areas under consideration. The basis of the new estimate suggested +by Cook is a more intensive use of historical sources and readier +acceptance of the observations found there. He says, "Evidence of +misstatement should be looked for and, if found, should be discounted or +discredited. Otherwise it should be admitted at face value." + +Kroeber has recognized the discrepancy between his estimates and those +based on historical statements. He agrees that, if the extrapolations +from the latter are accepted, the Merriam figure of 260,000 persons +would probably be more accurate. The difficulty there is that "if +we accept 260,000, one-quarter of all United States Indians were in +California; and this seems unlikely enough. Shall we then assume that +Mooney and practically all American anthropologists computed far too +low?" (1939, p. 179). Kroeber leaves the question unanswered but Cook's +recent work carries the implication that the answer is decidedly +affirmative. + +The estimate in this paper of the population of the California +Athabascans agrees with Cook's results, raising Kroeber's estimates; +in fact, it goes even further than Cook in that direction. But the +estimates here, with one exception, have been based on village counts +by ethnographers rather than on historical data. The fact that the +estimates run so high tends to bear out Cook's contention that the +Kroeber estimates should be raised. + +In basing population estimates on village counts there are several +sources of error. Among these are assumptions regarding the number of +persons per house and the number of houses per village. I believe that +all the assumptions I have made in this regard have been conservative +and therefore would not result in overestimates. The number of houses +per village can sometimes be calculated rather closely from the number +of house pits seen in the sites. That is, the houses can be calculated +closely if the assumption is correct that four-fifths of the number of +house pits in a site represents the number of simultaneously occupied +houses. Admittedly, this figure is rather speculative, but the best +opinions I have been able to get grant that it is probably conservative. + +A more serious possible source of error concerns the question of which +and how many sites were simultaneously occupied. When there is a +complete village count, I have excluded from consideration known summer +villages, villages not on main salmon streams, and other villages of +doubtful status. Even so, the villages run about one per mile along the +salmon streams and the possibility presents itself of movement from site +to site, perhaps in response to varying fishing conditions. If this was +the practice, then the population estimates might have to be reduced by +half or even more. But there is no concrete evidence to support such a +theory and it is a fact that the Goddard material gives quite complete +information of this kind. Therefore, if the present calculation is an +overestimate, it is not a very great one. + + +ESTIMATES BASED ON VILLAGE COUNTS + +_Wailaki (Eel and North Fork)._--The present list gives a total of 67 +villages among the Eel River and North Fork Wailaki. For purposes of +calculating population I have excluded 13 of them (nos. 6, 9, 16, 31, +38, 40, 51, 57, 58, 59, 61, 66, 67) because they are summer camps in +the hills, rock shelters used only briefly, or specialized fish-drying +camps. These places do not seem to have been used simultaneously with +the main villages. This list appears to be a substantially complete +count from Horseshoe Bend south, but it is clear that neither Merriam +nor Goddard visited the area north of this, and the village count +suffers as a result. There are about 16 river-miles south of Horseshoe +Bend, including both the main Eel and North Fork, and there are 49 main +villages on this stretch, yielding an average of 3.1 per river-mile. If +we apply this figure to the 7 river-miles above Horseshoe Bend, we get +21.7 villages for that stretch rather than 5, as given by ethnographers. +We may reduce this figure to 15, because this stretch of the river +appears to offer a less desirable location (Goddard, 1923_a_, p. 107). + +This calculation gives a total of 69 villages for the entire group, +considerably less than Cook's total of 87 (Cook, 1956, p. 104). The +reason for the difference is that Cook bases his estimate on Goddard's +data, with the territory of the Wailaki extending above Kekawaka Creek, +whereas I have taken Kekawaka Creek as the boundary. + +The house count per site for this group must be extrapolated from +Goddard's house-pit counts (1923_a_, pp. 103, 105) on the sites of +two of the tribelets. This figure has been calculated by Cook, who +takes Goddard's house-pit count for 20 sites as "92 pits." For two +localities, however, Goddard specifies a certain number plus "several" +others. "If we allow 4 to represent 'several,' in each of these, then +the total number of pits is 100 and the average per site or village +is 5.0" (Cook, 1956, p. 104). Cook then reduces the figure by 20 per +cent to allow for the probability that not all the house pits represent +simultaneously occupied houses. His average number of houses per site is +4, which would not appear to be an overestimate. If we take this figure, +we have a total of 276 houses for the Wailaki as against Cook's figure +of 348, which was based on a greater area. + +Cook takes 6 persons per house as the average density for the Wailaki. +This figure is arrived at in several ways. The figure of 7.5 per house +is well established for the Yurok and sets an upper limit for the +Wailaki area. Goddard appears to have based his population estimate on +a mean of 4.5 persons per house, almost certainly too low, and Cook +compromised at 6 per house. This figure is supported by independent +observation by Foster on the Round Valley Yuki (Cook, 1956, p. 107). The +social organization and the habitat of the Yuki and Wailaki are nearly +identical, so the population per house should be the same for both +groups. + +Accepting the figure of 6 persons per house, we get a total population +of 1,656 for the Eel Wailaki and the North Fork Wailaki, as compared +with Cook's figure of 2,315 and Goddard's figure of between one and two +thousand. + +_Pitch Wailaki._--Goddard (1924) records 33 villages for the Pitch +Wailaki. For two of the four tribelets, the count is virtually complete. +For a third tribelet, the T'odannañkiyahañ, Goddard lists 6 villages and +indicates that there were probably more (1924, p. 225). If, to allow for +these possible villages, we add 5 to the total above, we get a total of +38 villages for three tribelets, or an average of 12.7 per tribelet. +Although the fourth tribelet, the Tchokotkiyahañ, had a poorer habitat +than the other three (Goddard, 1924, p. 222), we may assume that it had +at least 8 villages, an estimate which is probably conservative in view +of its extensive territory. We then get a total of 46 villages for the +Pitch Wailaki. + +Goddard counted house pits in 22 village sites and got an average of +5 per site. If we reduce this to 4 to account for unoccupied pits, we +have an estimate of 184 houses for the Pitch Wailaki, as against 172 +estimated by Cook. On the basis of 6 persons per house this gives a +population of 1,104 as against 1,032 by Cook and between 650 and 800 by +Goddard. + +For all Wailaki combined we get a total of 2,760. Cook's figure +is 3,350, Kroeber's is 1,000, and Goddard's is between 1,650 and +2,800--average of 2,225. The difference between the figure presented +here and Cook's figure is mostly due to the adjustment I have made in +the Wailaki boundary from the one used by Goddard. + +_Mattole._--The village lists of Merriam and Goddard give a total of 42 +villages for the Mattole. I have excluded 5 of these from calculation of +population estimates, one because it is a summer camp and four others +because the frequency appears too great, in places along the coast, to +make simultaneous occupation likely. This leaves a total of 37, very +likely a conservative estimate since Goddard gives a number of names of +villages not located and therefore not included in our calculations. + +Cook estimates 6 houses per village for the Mattole on the basis of +comparison with the Wiyot, Yurok, Tolowa, and Chilula. Goddard counted +house pits for a few sites of the Mattole and they appear to average +less than that. Not much reliance can be placed on this average, because +the sample was very small. However, the number of houses per site is +probably not as high as among the Yurok. I have compromised with a +figure of 5.4, the same as the estimate for the Sinkyone, the eastern +neighbors of the Mattole. + +Cook takes Kroeber's Yurok figure of 7.5 persons per house in +calculating Mattole population. The social organization here is more +nearly like that of the southern Athabascans, so I have used 6 per +house. This figure gives a total population of 1,200 as against 840 +figured by Cook for the Mattole exclusive of Bear River. The difference +here is due to the fact that Goddard's village lists were not available +to Cook. If they had been, he would have obtained a figure of 1,665, or +nearly double his actual estimate. + +_Lolangkok Sinkyone._--For the Sinkyone on the northern part of the +South Fork of the Eel we have a nearly complete village count. South of +Larabee Creek Goddard and Merriam give a total of 46 villages. North +of Larabee Creek on the main Eel the village count is incomplete, but +Merriam gives 8 place names. That these place names represent village +names is clear from the Merriam place names farther south which can +be checked against Goddard's data. Together, these give a total of 54 +villages but leave out the areas of Bull Creek and the upper Mattole +River. We may assume 5 villages in each of these, surely a conservative +estimate in view of the density of sites on Salmon Creek and South Fork. +We thus have an estimate of 64 villages for the Northern Sinkyone. + +Goddard counted house pits in 24 of the sites he recorded. They come to +a total of 162 or 6.7 per village. If we reduce this by 20 per cent to +account for unoccupied pits, we get an average of 5.4 houses per site +or a total estimate of 346 houses among the Lolangkok Sinkyone. At 6 +persons per house this estimate yields a total population of 2,076. + +_Hupa._--In the present village list there are 11 villages in Hoopa +Valley and 16 above the valley on the main Trinity and on South Fork. Of +these sixteen, three have been rejected as being in Chimariko territory +(nos. 25, 26, 27). Cook has argued, reasonably, it appears, that the +villages in Hoopa Valley average 11 houses, whereas the villages above +the valley average 4.5 houses each. This average gives a total of 193 +houses for the Hupa. + +Cook has estimated that there is an average of 10 persons per house +among the Hupa. This figure is arrived at by the following line of +reasoning: according to a census taken in 1870 there was a total of 601 +persons in 7 villages at that time, of which 232 were male and 359 were +female. This count indicates a disproportionate number of males and +Cook therefore calculates a population of twice the number of females, +or 718, as a more normal population. Goddard's data give the number of +houses for these villages as 92, a figure Cook takes as representing the +situation in 1850. This combination yields an average of 7.8 persons +per house. Since there had certainly been a decline in population +between 1850 and 1870, Cook proposes that the figure for the density of +population be raised to 10 persons per house. + +But Goddard does not say what period his figures represent, so I +propose to follow a line of reasoning similar to that of Cook but to +use different figures. The number of houses for 6 villages in 1851 is +reported by Gibbs (see map, pl. 9). We may compare these to the 1870 +population estimates as given by Kroeber (1925_a_, p. 131). If we +adjust for male attrition by calculating population as twice the female +population, or 640 (see table 1), we get a density per house of 7.8, +exactly the same figure that Cook gets. + + +TABLE 1 + +_Hupa Population, 1870[1]_ + + =============================================== + | | | + Village | Males | Females | Houses + _______________|_________|___________|_________ + | + Honsading | 25 30 9 + Miskut | 32 49 6 + Takimitlding | 51 74 20 + Tsewenalding | 14 31 10 + Medilding | 75 100 28 + Djishtangading | 14 36 9 + |_______________________________ + | + Total | 211 320 82 + _______________|_______________________________ + +[1] Kroeber, 1925_a_, p. 131. + +That there was a decline in population between 1850 and 1870 is agreed +by all authorities. This fact makes it very attractive to accept Cook's +proposed density of 10 persons per house for the Hupa in aboriginal +times. But there are two objections to this procedure. For one thing, +the population figures for 1870 may be inaccurate. In the census of +that year, there were reported 874 Indians of all tribes on the Hoopa +Reservation (Kroeber, 1925a, p. 131). But in the same year another +agent reported only 649 Indians on the reservation. This is a 25 per +cent reduction, and if we reduce the population estimate of 640 by 25 +per cent, we get 480 as the estimate for 1870 and a density per house +of 5.9. If we raise the population of 480 to account for the 1850-1870 +reduction, we are again close to the figure 7.5 persons per house. This +calculation is presented merely to indicate that the figures are not +reliable. + +The other objection to accepting Cook's proposed figure for density is +that the established figure for the Yurok is 7.5 persons per house. +According to Cook, this figure was based on an underlying assumption +that "the social family in the usual monogamous tribe included the +father, mother, children, and occasional close relatives" (Cook, 1956, +p. 99). As a matter of fact, Kroeber's estimate is not based on this +assumption but is an empirical estimate based on population counts +and house counts (Kroeber, 1925_a_, pp. 16-19), and the figure is +accepted wholeheartedly by Cook for the Yurok (1956, p. 83). But what +is certainly clear is that the social organization, house type, and +environment of the Hupa was virtually the same as that of the Yurok and +therefore the population density per house must have been the same. It +is therefore clear that we must accept either 7.5 persons per house or +10 persons per house as the population density for both the Hupa and the +Yurok, and the question becomes one of comparing the reliability of the +figures given for the Yurok with those given for the Hupa. Yurok figures +appear to be intrinsically more reliable and are also earlier and I have +therefore taken 7.5 persons per house as the density. + +The population for the Hupa then comes to 1,475 as compared to 2,000 +estimated by Cook and to less than 1,000 estimated by Kroeber. + +_Whilkut._--The number of permanent villages among the Whilkut has +been estimated here at 69. This estimate excludes known summer camps +and other villages away from the main salmon streams. For the Chilula +Whilkut there are 23 villages. For the Kloki Whilkut there are 16 +villages, including several which are not shown on the map but which +are listed by Merriam as being on upper Redwood Creek. Ten villages +have been taken from the North Fork Whilkut. Twenty villages are taken +from the Mad River Whilkut even though only 16 are given in the village +lists. Wherever both Merriam and Goddard worked the same area the +latter has recorded substantially more villages than the former. I have +therefore added 4 to the village count to make up for the presumptive +lack, thus bringing the total up to 69. + +House-pit counts from the Chilula Whilkut are listed for six villages +by Kroeber (1925_a_, p. 138) as 17, 7, 4, 2, 4, 8, or an average of 7 +per village. Kroeber reduces this average by a third, on the basis of +his estimates for the Yurok and Hupa, to arrive at a figure of 5 houses +per village. Cook (1956, p. 84) says the reduction should be only about +10 per cent, calculated on the basis of Waterman's study of the Yurok +(Waterman, 1920), and he compromises, making a reduction of a seventh to +use 6 as an average number of houses per village. + +The sample used by Kroeber and Cook is so small that an estimate +based on it of the average number of house pits per village is liable +to considerable error. If we look at the figures for some of the +surrounding groups, we find an estimate of 11 houses per village for +the Hupa in Hoopa Valley, 4.5 for the Hupa outside the valley, 4 for +the Wailaki, 4.5 for the Wiyot (Cook, 1956, p. 102), and 5.4 for the +Lolangkok Sinkyone. The Whilkut terrain and culture is certainly more +nearly like the region outside Hoopa Valley than inside it, so we are +scarcely justified in estimating more than 5 houses per village. + +On this basis we get a total of 345 houses for the Whilkut. Both Kroeber +and Cook use the Yurok figure of 7.5 persons per house in calculating +the population of this group. This figure may well be too high, and +perhaps it should be more nearly the same as the estimate for the +southern groups, but since I have no concrete evidence to support such a +contention, I have also used the Kroeber and Cook figure. This gives a +total population of 2,588 for the Whilkut. + +Cook's figures for the groups which were formerly listed under the +Chilula and Whilkut were 800 and 1,300 making a total of 2,100. +Kroeber's figures were 600 and 400 for a total of 1,000. The difference +between Cook's figures and those given here is partly due to the fact +that Cook took the group on the North Fork of the Mad to be Wiyot, +whereas I have them as Whilkut. Also Cook made a reduction of a ninth +in his Mad River estimates because of the poor environment there. I +have not done this because the Mad River region does not seem to me +noticeably poorer than that along Redwood Creek. + + +ESTIMATES BASED ON FISH RESOURCES + +For the six tribes just discussed, the ethnographic notes at our +disposal offer a means of estimating the population, but we have also +another basis for our calculations. Fishery was the most important +single factor in the California Athabascan economy, hence the fish +resources of the region undoubtedly exerted a marked influence on +population size. Therefore, before attempting to estimate the population +of the remaining groups, for which we have scanty ethnographic +information, I would like to present some data on the fish resources of +the region. + +I have attempted to calculate the number of stream miles of fishing +available and thereby to form some estimate of the economic basis of +each of the groups. Most of my information comes from Mr. Almo J. +Cordone, Junior Aquatic Biologist of the California Department of +Fish and Game, who was kind enough to gather the relevant data from +the records of that organization. I have not included material on the +freshwater trout, which was apparently too scarce to be important, or +on the lamprey eel, on which we do not have sufficient information, +although it was of some importance, especially in the Eel River and its +tributaries. + +The available stream miles of fishing may seem insufficient material +on which to base estimates of fish resources and unquestionably it +would be desirable to have some idea of the fish population per mile of +stream in order to estimate the food value of the resources available to +the people. On the other hand, this point may not be as crucial as it +seems, for apparently the fish population was not a governing factor in +the number of fish taken by the Indians. According to Rostlund (1952, +p. 17), the aboriginal fishermen of California did not even approach +overfishing. If this is so, then there must have been fish left uncaught +even in the smaller salmon streams and it would therefore seem that +one stream was nearly as good as another, if it carried salmon at all. +An exception would be the Trinity River and its tributaries, the only +streams in the Athabascan area with both spring and fall runs of salmon. +In other streams there is only a fall run. + +The lists that follow include data, not only for the six tribes +previously discussed (Wailaki, Pitch Wailaki, Mattole, Lolangkok +Sinkyone, Hupa, and Whilkut), but also for the Nongatl, Kato, Shelter +Cove Sinkyone, Lassik, and Bear River groups. The fish species is +recorded, when it is known; when our source gives no identification of +species, however, the generic term is used. + +_Available Stream Miles for Fishing in Tribal Territory_ + +KATO 29 mi. + + South Fork Eel R.--19 mi. Quantities of steelhead and silver + salmon go up at least to Branscomb and King salmon go at least to + Ten Mile Cr. (Dept. of Fish and Game). + + Hollow Tree Cr.--5 mi. There was fishing on this stream + (Gifford, 1939, p. 304). Fish not specified, probably steelhead and + salmon. + + Ten Mile Cr.--5 mi. This stream appears to be large enough + for salmon and there were villages on it. Also the Fish and Game + information for South Fork implies fish in the stream. + +WAILAKI (Eel R. and North Fork Wailaki) 23 mi. + + Eel R.--16 mi. There are good runs of salmon as far up as Lake + Pillsbury (Dept. of Fish and Game). + + North Fork Eel--7 mi. Salmon go up North Fork farther than 7 + mi. (see Pitch Wailaki). + +PITCH WAILAKI 15 mi. + + North Fork Eel--12 mi. See below. + + Casoose and Hulls creeks--3 mi. The Dept of Fish and Game + states that salmon do not ascend North Fork above Asbill Cr. but + Goddard's informant (see Pitch Wailaki Village no. 21) said that + fish got up into Hulls and Casoose creeks, the mouths of which are + above Asbill Cr. The Dept. of Fish and Game information may refer + to a more recent situation. + +LASSIK 25 mi. + + Eel R.--17 mi. (See Wailaki.) + + Dobbyn Cr.--8 mi. There would seem to have been fish in Dobbyn + Cr., since it is a fair-sized stream and there were many villages + on it. + +SHELTER COVE SINKYONE 67 mi. + + South Fork Eel--39 mi. There were a good many fish in South + Fork as far up as Branscomb (Dept. of Fish and Game). + + Redwood Cr.--5 mi. According to Merriam the region around + Redwood Cr. was a center for the Shelter Cove Sinkyone; therefore + there must have been fish in the creek. + + Mattole R.--11 mi. There is a partial barrier to salmon at the + community of Thorn but some fish get up even beyond this (Dept. of + Fish and Game). + + East Branch, South Fork Eel--4 mi. King salmon and silver + salmon go up at least to Squaw Cr. (3 mi.) and steelhead go up at + least to Rancheria Cr. (4.5 mi., according to the Dept. of Fish and + Game). + + Sea Coast--8 mi. The Shelter Cove Sinkyone have 16 mi. of + sea coast. The only reliable data on the density of sea coast + population in relation to the riverine population are given by + Kroeber (1925a, p. 116). According to his figures, the seashore is + about half as productive as the rivers and I have therefore halved + the sea coast mileage in the calculation of available fishing miles. + +LOLANGKOK SINKYONE 63 mi. + + Eel R.--27 mi. (See Wailaki.) + + South Fork Eel R.--16 mi. (See Kato.) + + Bull Cr.--6 mi. According to Merriam, there was a large + settlement on Bull Cr. It could not have been supported without + fish. + + Salmon Cr.--5 mi. Goddard mentions fishing on at least part of + this stream. + + Mattole R.--10 mi. The fish go beyond this stretch at least as + far as Thorn (Dept. of Fish and Game). + +MATTOLE 38.5 mi. + + Mattole R.--25 mi. The fish go considerably beyond here in the + Mattole. + + North Fork Mattole--5 mi. North Fork is a sizable stream and + there were several villages along it, so it probably had fish in it. + + Sea Coast--8.5 mi. The Mattole have 17 mi. of sea coast. This + has been halved in accordance with the principle stated above. + +BEAR RIVER 21 mi. + + Bear R.--18 mi. This figure is rather arbitrary since the + information is poor for this stream. It is known that silver salmon + and steelhead are caught there and that there is a fall run of King + salmon (Dept. of Fish and Game). + + Sea Coast--3 mi. The Bear River group has 6 mi. of sea coast, + halved for present purposes. + +NONGATL 85 mi. + + Van Duzen R.--40 mi. Steelhead go up as far as Eaton Roughs + (40 mi.). Silver salmon go up as far as Grizzly Cr. (21 mi.) and + probably as far as Eaton Roughs. There are no data on King salmon + but it is known that there is a fall run of them here. Information + from Dept. of Fish and Game. + + Eel R.--5 mi. All 5 mi. of the Eel in Nongatl territory should + provide excellent fishing. + + Larabee Cr.--20 mi. There is no direct information on this + stream, but it is of considerable size and there were many villages + at least 20 mi. up. + + Yager Cr.--20 mi. Again we have no direct information but + there are many villages far up on this stream. Twenty miles of + available fishing is probably a conservative estimate. + + Mad R.--0 mi. There is a long stretch of Mad R. in Nongatl + territory but, according to the Dept. of Fish and Game, no fish go + up so far. + +WHILKUT 70 mi. + + Mad R.--27 mi. There is a 12-ft. falls at Bug Cr. which + represents a nearly complete barrier to salmon. This means that + there are salmon in nearly all the territory of the Mad R. Whilkut. + + North Fork Mad R.--8 mi. According to Merriam, there were + fishing camps nearly this far up on North Fork. + + Redwood Cr.--35 mi. There is no direct information on this + stream. I have attributed salmon to nearly its whole length because + of the size of the stream and the large number of villages along + its upper course. + +HUPA 39 mi. + + Trinity R.--27 mi. There are fish in this whole stretch (Dept. + of Fish and Game). + + South Fork Trinity--12 mi. There are known to be salmon in + South Fork, and presumably they go up as far as the border of Hupa + territory. + + +TABLE 2 + +_Area, Fishing Miles, and Population Estimates_ + + ===================================================================== + | | | | | + Tribe[2] | Pop. | Area | Ln Area | Fishing | Ln Fishing + | Estimate | | | Miles | Miles + ___________________|__________|______|_________|_________|___________ + | | | | | + Wailaki | 1,656 | 296 | 5.69 | 23 | 3.14 + Pitch Wailaki | 1,104 | 182 | 5.20 | 15 | 2.71 + Mattole | 1,200 | 170 | 5.14 | 38.5 | 3.65 + Lolangkok Sinkyone | 2,076 | 294 | 5.68 | 63 | 4.14 + Hupa | 1,475 | 424 | 6.05 | 39 | 3.66 + Whilkut | 2,588 | 461 | 6.13 | 70 | 4.25 + |__________|______|_________|_________|___________ + Average | 1,683 | | 5.65 | | 3.59 + ___________________|__________|______|_________|_________|___________ + +[2] Relatively complete village counts. + + +TABLE 3 + +_Area and Fishing Miles_ + + ============================================================= + | | | | + Tribe[3] | Area | Ln Area | Fishing | Ln Fishing + | | | Miles | Miles + ______________________|______|_________|_________|___________ + | | | | + Kato | 225 | 5.42 | 29 | 3.37 + Bear River | 121 | 4.80 | 21 | 3.04 + Lassik | 389 | 5.96 | 25 | 3.22 + Nongatl | 855 | 6.75 | 85 | 4.44 + Shelter Cove Sinkyone | 350 | 5.86 | 67 | 4.20 + ______________________|______|_________|_________|___________ + +[3] Incomplete village counts. + + +GROSS ESTIMATE + +From the preceding data we have obtained population estimates for +certain of the California Athabascan groups. If these estimates are +judged reliable, it would be desirable to use them as a basis for +estimating the population of the remaining groups. When a detailed +analysis of the ecological or demographical factors involved is lacking, +it is sometimes necessary to fall back on rather simplistic assumptions +to attain the desired end. Cook goes rather far in this direction, using +simply the average population density per square mile of the known +groups to estimate the population of the unknown groups. + +It appears to this writer that a somewhat more satisfactory method of +estimation would be based on simple linear regression theory. It is +a fact that pertinent relationships in population studies can often +be expressed in terms of simple exponential functions or in linear +combinations of logarithms. Thus we might propose a relationship such as +the following: + + population = a + b (ln area) + +or + + population = a + b (ln fishing miles) + +where a and b are constants to be determined and ln is the logarithm to +the base e. + +Of course we would not expect these relationships to be precise. +The lack of exactness might be due to the crudeness of the various +measurements involved or perhaps to the fact that population depends on +more than one such factor. To account in some way for the uncertainty, +we might make a further assumption and propose the following +relationships: + + population = a + b (ln area) + X + + population = a + b (ln fishing miles) + X + +where X has a normal probability distribution with mean = 0 and some +unknown variance = =s=^{2}. X is then, roughly speaking, the error +involved in each observation. That the error would be distributed +normally is quite reasonable under the circumstances. In situations +where the uncertainty of the observation is due to measurement error +or to a multiplicity of factors, the distribution obtained often +assumes a normal form or a form sufficiently normal so that the normal +distribution can be used as an approximation. + +One additional assumption is necessary. We must assume that the sample +used is taken in a random fashion from the population to be studied. In +the present investigation, the sample is definitely not taken at random, +since we are using all groups for which we have population estimates +based on ethnographic information. The question is, then, whether this +selection of groups would result in some bias. For instance, the groups +for which we have ethnographic data might be the most numerous in the +first place and might thus cause us overestimate the population of +the remaining groups. On the whole, it would seem to me that there is +no such bias and that the assumption of a random sample is therefore +not misleading, at least in the direction of overestimation. If we now +consider each group for which we have no ethnographic data, we can see +whether the lack of such data is due to an initially small population or +to mere luck. + + Kato: The reason Kato population is being estimated in gross + rather than from ethnographic data is that Goddard (1909, p. 67) + obtained a list of more than 50 villages which are not available + for calculation. + + Bear River: Here the lack of information is due simply to the + fact that it was not collected. There have been several informants + living until recently (see Nomland, 1938). + + Lassik: There was at least one good informant living until + recently (Essene, 1942), but Merriam worked with her only briefly. + Goddard evidently recorded a number of villages from this group, + but his notes are lost. + + Nongatl: Goddard seems to have worked with at least two + informants from this group, but he spent a very brief time in the + area and some of his notes may have been lost. + + Shelter Cove Sinkyone: Several informants from this group have + been alive until recently (see Nomland, 1935). No one saw fit to + collect the appropriate data. + +It is obvious from this summary that the main reason for our lack of +information on these groups is the loss of Goddard's notes. If those +were at hand, we would probably have complete information on the Kato, +the Lassik, and probably the Nongatl. The absence of data on the Bear +River and Shelter Cove Sinkyone is due to the ethnographers' oversight. +None of these groups, therefore, seem to have been selected because of +their small aboriginal population. If the following estimates are in +error because the sample is not a random one, then the error is probably +one of underestimate rather than overestimate. + +Given the foregoing assumptions, the least squares estimate of the +normal regression line may be obtained with the following formula. + + P: population. A: area. F: fishing miles. + +The equations of the lines are: + + P = a + b (ln A) + + P = a' + b' (ln F) + +the estimate of b is (Bennett and Franklin, 1954, p. 224) + + =S=(X_{i} - [=X])(Y_{i} - [=Y]) + [^b] = ------------------------------- + =S=(X_{i} - X)^{2} + +and of a is + + â = [=Y] - [^b][=X] + +where X_{i} = ln A for each group with known population and Y_{i} = P +for each known group. + +Similarly the estimate of b' is + + =S=(X_{i} - [=X])(Y_{i} - [=Y]) + [^b]' = ------------------------------- + =S=(X_{i} - [=X])^{2} + +and of a' is + + â' = [=Y] - [^b]'[=X] + +where X_i = ln F for each known group and Y_i = P for each known group. +These calculations are shown in table 4. + + +TABLE 4 + +_Calculation of Regression Lines Shown in Figure 2_ + + ================================================================= + + Fishing Miles + _________________________________________________________________ + + (X_i - [=X]) (Y_i - [=Y]) (X_i - [=X])(Y_i - [=Y]) (X_i - [=X])^2 + + -.452 -.027 .012 .204 + -.882 -.579 .511 .778 + .058 -.483 -.028 .003 + .548 .393 .215 .300 + .068 -.208 -.014 .005 + .658 .905 .595 .433 + ---- ---- ----- ----- + Total. 1.291 1.723 + _________________________________________________________________ + + Area + _________________________________________________________________ + + (X_i - [=X]) (Y_i - [=Y]) (X_i - [=X])(Y_i - [=Y]) (X_i - [=X])^2 + + .041 -.027 -.001 .002 + -.445 .579 .258 .198 + -.514 -.483 .248 .264 + .034 .393 .013 .001 + .400 -.208 -.083 .160 + .484 .905 .438 .234 + ---- ---- ---- ---- + Total. .873 .859 + _________________________________________________________________ + +The results are the following equations, which are shown, together with +the points from which they were calculated, on figure 2. + + P = 1.02 (ln A) - 4.06 + + P = .75 (ln F) - 1.00 + +Thus, given either the area of a group or the fishing miles of a group +habitat, we may estimate its population. From the diagram in figure 2 it +appears that the estimates based on area have greater dispersion than +those based on fishing miles and are therefore less reliable. This fact +can best be made precise by using the above assumptions to obtain the +confidence intervals for each of the estimates. The confidence intervals +for the area estimates are given by the following formula (Bennett and +Franklin, 1954, p. 229). + + _______________________ + {1 (X_o - [=X])^2 } + 1.02 X_o - 4.06 ± t_[oc]S_a × [Sqrt]{- + -----------------} + {6 =S=(X_i - [=X])^2} + +where the symbols have the following values and meanings: + + [10.6] X_o: the log of the area of the group for which the + population is being estimated. + + X_i: the log of the area of each of the groups for which the + population is already known. + + [=X]: the average of the X_i. + + t_[oc]: the upper [oc]-point of the t-distribution (Bennett + and Franklin, 1954, p. 696) where 1-[oc] is the confidence + coefficient. + + _________________________________ + {1 } + S_a = [Sqrt]{- × =S=(Y_i + 4.06 - 1.02X_i)^2} + {4 } + + where Y_i is the population of each of the groups for which + population is known. This is the estimated standard deviation of + population where the estimate is made from area. + +[Illustration: Fig. 2. Simple linear regression of population. _a_. +Regression of population on ln area. _b_. Regression of population on ln +fishing miles.] + +The confidence intervals for the fishing-mile estimates may be obtained +in similar fashion--simply substituting the words fishing mile for area +and S_{f} for S_{a}. + +For calculating the confidence intervals for area we have the following +quantities: + + [=X] = 5.56 + + t_{.2} = 1.533 + + =S=(X_i - [=X])^2 = .859 + + S_{a} = .3594 + +The calculations are shown in table 5. + +The comparable quantities in calculating the confidence intervals for +fishing-mile estimates are: + + [=X] = 3.70 + + t_{.2} = 1.533 + + =S=(X_{i} - [=X])^2 = .932 + + S_{f} = .394 + +The calculations are shown in table 6. + + +TABLE 5 + +_Calculation of Confidence Intervals for Area_ + + Column headings: + + A = X_{o} + + B = (X_{o} - [=X]) + + (X_{o} - [=X])^2 + C = --------------------- + =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2) + + ___________________________ + {1 (X_{o} - [=X])^2 } + D = [Sqrt]{- + ---------------------} + {6 =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2)} + + ___________________________ + {1 (X_{o} - [=X])^2 } + E = t_{.2}S_{a} × Sqrt{- + ---------------------} + {6 =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2)} + + =========================================================== + | + Tribe | [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] + ______________________|____________________________________ + | + Kato | 5.42 -.23 .0616 .4778 .263 + Bear River | 4.80 -.83 .8510 1.0088 .556 + Lassik | 5.96 .31 .1119 .5278 .291 + Nongatl | 6.75 1.10 1.4086 1.2551 .692 + Shelter Cove Sinkyone | 5.86 .21 .0513 .4669 .257 + ______________________|____________________________________ + + +TABLE 6 + +Calculation of Fishing-Mile Estimates + + Column headings: + + A = X_{o} + + B = (X_{o} - [=X]) + + + C = --------------------- + =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2) + + ___________________________ + {1 (X_{o} - [=X])^2 } + D = [Sqrt]{- + ---------------------} + {6 =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2)} + + ___________________________ + {1 (X_{o} - [=X])^2 } + E = t_{.2}S_{f} × Sqrt{- + ---------------------} + {6 =S=((X_{i} - [=X])^2)} + + =========================================================== + | + Tribe | [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] + ______________________|____________________________________ + | + Kato | 3.37 -.22 .0281 .4414 .267 + Bear River | 3.04 -.55 .1756 .5851 .353 + Lassik | 3.22 -.37 .0795 .4962 .300 + Nongatl | 4.44 .85 .4193 .7655 .462 + Shelter Cove Sinkyone | 4.20 .67 .2160 .6186 .374 + +The results of the calculations are given in table 7. The figures are +point estimates with 80 per cent confidence intervals. This means that +under the assumptions given earlier we expect that the tabled intervals +will contain the true population 8 times out of 10. I have accepted the +estimates derived from fishing miles because their confidence intervals +are a bit shorter on the average. + + +TABLE 7 + +_Population Estimates and Confidence Intervals_ + + Fishing-mile Area + Tribe Estimate Estimate + ---------------------|-------------------|------------- + Kato |1,523 ± 267 | 1,470 ± 263 + Bear River |1,276 ± 353 | 840 ± 556 + Lassik |1,411 ± 300 | 2,020 ± 291 + Nongatl |2,325 ± 462 | 2,830 ± 692 + Shelter Cove Sinkyone|2,145 ± 374 | 1,920 ± 257 + ---------------------|-------------------|------------- + +The question of whether the fishing-mile estimates yield shorter +confidence intervals than the area estimates brings up an entire range +of problems pertaining to economy, settlement pattern, and the like. The +obvious interpretation of the shorter confidence intervals would be that +the economy of the people in question depended more on fish and fishing +than on the general produce over the whole range of their territory. The +question then becomes one of quantitative expression--we would like to +have some index of the extent of dependence on various factors in the +economy. This might best be approached from the standpoint of analysis +of covariance, where we would obtain the "components of variance." This +technique is a combination of the methods of regression used in this +paper and those of the analysis of variance. It would evidently yield +sound indices of economic components, but it involves, for myself at +least, certain problems of calculation and interpretation which will +have to be resolved in the future. + +Another problem of this kind turns on the question of which factors +are important in which area. Considering the State of California, for +instance, we might want to know about such factors as deer population, +water supply, the quantity of oak trees, etc. Any one of these factors +or any combination of them might be important in a particular area; the +problem of gathering the pertinent information then becomes crucial. +Moreover, because the situation has changed since aboriginal times, we +must combine modern information with available historic sources. S. +F. Cook has shown that energetic and imaginative use of these sources +yields very good results (e.g., Cook, 1955). + +Finally, there is the problem of the assumptions we were required to +make in order to obtain our population estimates. Although many of +the assumptions in the present paper are difficult to assess, the two +which I would like to discuss here were particularly unyielding--the +assumptions of the number of persons per house and the assumptions of +the number of houses per village. + +The question of how many persons there were per house has been dealt +with extensively by both Kroeber and Cook. There is also a great deal +of random information in the ethnographic and historical literature. I +believe there are enough data now at hand to provide realistic limits +within which we could work, at least for the State of California. This +information should be assembled and put into concise and systematic form +so that it would be available for use in each area. It would also be of +interest in itself from the standpoint of social anthropology. + +For the number of houses per village we have also a considerable body of +information, but here we are faced with a slightly different problem. +It often happens that we know, from ethnographic information or from +archaeological reconnaissance, how many house pits there are in a +village site but do not know how many of the houses which these pits +represent were occupied simultaneously. In the present paper it has +been assumed that four-fifths of the house pits represents the number +of houses in the village occupied at any one time. This, however, is +simply a guess, and one has no way of knowing how accurate a guess. The +solution to this problem is simple but laborious. From each area of the +State a random sample of villages with recorded house counts should be +taken. Each of these village sites should then be visited and the house +pits counted. A comparison of the two sets of figures would give us a +perfectly adequate estimate, which could then be used subsequently over +the entire area. + + +TABLE 8 + +_Population Estimates_ + + --------------------------------------------------------------------- + Tribe |Area |Fishing| Pop. |Area |Fishing-|Kroeber[5]| Cook[6] + | (sq | |Esti- |Den- | | mile | + | mi) | Miles | mate |sity |Density | Estimate |Estimate + -------------+-----+-------+------+-----+--------+----------+-------- + Kato[4] | 225 | 29 | 1,523| 6.77| 52.5 | 500 | 1,100 + Wailaki | 296 | 23 | 1,656| 5.59| 72.0 | 600 | 2,315 + Pitch Wailaki| 182 | 15 | 1,104| 6.07| 73.6 | 400 | 1,032 + Lassik[4] | 389 | 25 | 1,411| 3.63| 56.4 | 500 | 1,500 + Shelter Cove | 350 | 67 | 2,145| 6.13| 32.0 | 375 | 1,450 + Sinkyone[4]| | | | | | | + Lolangkok | 294 | 63 | 2,076| 7.06| 33.0 | 375 | 1,450 + Sinkyone | | | | | | | + Mattole | 170 | 38.5 | 1,200| 7.06| 31.2 | 350 | 840 + Bear River[4]| 121 | 21 | 1,276|10.55| 60.8 | 150 | 360 + Nongatl[4] | 855 | 85 | 2,325| 2.72| 27.4 | 750 | 3,300 + Whilkut | 461 | 70 | 2,588| 5.61| 37.0 | 1,000 | 2,100 + Hupa | 424 | 39 | 1,475| 3.48| 37.8 | 1,000 | 2,000 + |-----+-------+------+-----+--------+----------+-------- + Total |3,767| 475.5 |18,779| 4.99| 39.5 | 6,000 | 17,447 + --------------------------------------------------------------------- + +[4] The population figures for these groups are estimated in the gross +by the method indicated in the text. + +[5] Kroeber, 1925_a_, p. 883. The breakdown has been changed somewhat to +accommodate boundary changes; the total remains the same. The population +density, according to Kroeber's figures, is 1.6 persons per sq. mi. + +[6] Cook, 1956. The breakdown has been changed somewhat to accommodate +boundary changes; the total remains the same. The population density, +according to Cook's figures, is 4.6 persons per sq. mi. + +The corpus of information provided by the methods outlined above would +be useful in two ways. First, it would clarify our definitions of the +economic factors in the lives of hunter-gatherers. Functional hypotheses +which postulate dependence of social factors on economy would be subject +to objective, quantitative tests of their validity. + +Second, the corpus of information would afford a suitable basis for +inference from archaeological data. If we can determine what were the +major economic factors in the lives of a prehistoric people, then we +can make assertions about population, settlement pattern, and the +like. Conversely, information about population and settlement pattern +would imply certain facts about the economy. This technique has +already been developed to some extent. For instance, Cook and Heizer, +depending on assumptions derived from ethnographic data (Cook and +Treganza, 1950; Heizer, 1953; Heizer and Baumhoff, 1956), have made +inferences concerning village populations. These methods have such great +possibilities for the conjunctive approach in archaeology that their use +should be extended as much as possible. + + + + +APPENDIXES + + +APPENDIX I: THE TOLOWA + +The Tolowa are an Athabascan group living on the coast from a +short distance north of the mouth of the Klamath River to the +Oregon-California boundary. Information on this group has not been +included in the main body of the paper because the Tolowa are separated +from the other California Athabascan groups and belong more properly +with the Oregon Athabascans; It was thought, however, that Merriam's +data on the Tolowa should be recorded and they have therefore been +appended in this form. The following passages are taken verbatim from +Merriam's notes. + + +HAH-WUN-KWUT NOTES + +The following notes are from information given me by Sam Lopez and wife +and Lopez' father at the Mouth of Smith River, Del Norte County, Sept. +16-17, 1923. + +_Name._--The tribe as a whole had no distinctive name for themselves +except Huss, the word for people. But they had definite names for +village areas. Those living at the mouth of Smith River call themselves +Hah´-wun-kwut; those at Burnt Ranch, about three miles south of +the mouth of Smith River, Yahnk´-tah-kut; those at Crescent City +Tah-ah´-ten--and so on. + +_Location, boundaries, and neighbors._--The territory of the tribe +as a whole extends from Winchuk River (Um-sahng´-ten) on the +California-Oregon boundary south to Wilson Creek (Tah-ges^{hl}-ten) +about eight miles north of the mouth of Klamath River. + +The coast tribe immediately north (on the Oregon side of the line) is +called Cheet or Che´-te. Their language differs materially from that of +the Hah´-wun-kwut, though most of the words could be understood. Only a +single woman survives. + +The tribe on the south, from Wilson Creek to Klamath River, is called +Tah-che-ten-ne and Tet-le-mus (Polikla). + +The tribe immediately east of the Cheet on the Oregon side of the +California-Oregon boundary is called Ka-Ka-sha. Another name, Choo-ne, +also was given but I am in doubt as to whether or not the same tribe +was meant. The Ka-ka-sha live near Waldo on the north side of the +Siskiyou Mountains and speak a language widely different from that of +the Hah´-wun-kwut. They are said to be lighter in color than the coast +Indians. + +_Dress and ornament._--The people used deer skin blankets called +Nah-hi-ne tanned with the hair on, and also blankets of rabbit skin, +called Wa-gah hahs-nis-te. Deer skins tanned with the hair on are called +Nah-ki-le. The breech cloth formerly worn by the men was called Rut-soo +and tat-es-tat. Moccasins, Kus-ki-a, of elk hide were worn by rich men. + +The women wore a front apron called Sahng; and on dress occasions an +ornamented cloak-like skirt (Chah) that extended all the way around and +lapped over in front. They also wore basket hats, called Ki´-e-traht´ +and necklaces, the general term for which is Ni-ta-kle-ah. On occasions +they wore ear pendants, Bus-shra-mes-lah, of elk or deer bone. Nose +bones or shells, Mish-mes-lah, were sometimes worn; those of rich +persons consisted of one of the long _Dentalium_ shells. The chin is +tattooed with three narrow vertical lines called Tah-ah rut^{hl}-tes. + +_Houses._--The houses (Munt) were square and were built of planks or +slabs hewn from redwood trees and stood up vertically, as in the case +of those of the Klamath River Indians. The ceremonial houses are called +N[=a]´-stahs-m[=a]´-ne. They are square and have a ridge roof. During +important dances the front side is removed. The sweat house is called +Shes´-kl[)e] and is large enough to hold twenty people. It is square or +rectangular, and the ground floor is excavated to a depth of about four +feet. The roof is of hewn planks covered with earth. + +_Money._--The ordinary medium of exchange or "money" (Trut) consisted +of shells of _Dentalium_, of which the valuable long ones are called +T[=a]´-tos, the commoner short ones Kle´-ah. Clam shell disks or buttons +are called Nah´-set. + +_Treatment of dead._--The dead are buried in a grave (Ch[)e]´-slo). The +people assert that they never burned their dead. They say that a spirit +or ghost, called Nah-who´-tlan, goes out of the body after death and +becomes a ghost. + +_Ceremonial dances._--Dances are called N[=a]´-stahs or Nesh-stahsh. A +puberty dance, Chahs´-stah w[=a]´-nish tahs, was held for the girls. +Other important dances are held. Some last 5 days; others last 10 days. + +The ceremonial drums Hah´-et-sah differ radically from those of any +other California Indians known to me. They are large cooking baskets +about two feet in diameter. Only new baskets are used in order that they +may stand the drumming. + +Rattles called Chah-p[=a]t´-chah are made of the small hoofs of deer. +Cocoon rattles were not used. + +Whistles, called Tut´-tle-nik are made of large quill feathers of birds, +not of bone. + +_The stick game._--The stick game is a feature of the people, as in most +California tribes. It consists of a number of slender sticks called +Not-tr[=a]´-le, of which one, called Chah-when´, is marked. The counters +are called Chun´; the man who keeps count, Chun-ting. A dressed buckskin +is stretched tightly on the ground between the players, and when the +game is called, the sticks are thrown down upon it. + +_Baskets._--The basketry is of twined weave called Chet-too. The big +storehouse baskets, called Hawsh-tan, are closely woven and have a +shallow saucer-shape lid. The large open work burden basket is called +Tus, the large cooking basket, Met-too´-sil^{ch}, the small mush bowl +Hah´-tsah, the large shallow meal tray Mes-chet´-te-gah´, the large +open work shallow bowl Tre-kwahs´-tuk, the small open work plate or +platter Kah´-se, the subglobular choke-mouth trinket basket Net´-tah, +the milling basket Ki´-e-sut, the baby basket Kah´-yu, its shade +Ne´-whats-tah, the women's basket hat Ki´-e-traht´. There is also a +subglobular openwork basket called I´-[)a]-loo´ with an arched handle +for carrying on the arm. + +The cooking bowls, mush baskets, and other small baskets are made +of spruce roots, 'Hre´, more or less covered with an overlay of +bear grass (_Xerophyllum_, called Too-t[)e]^{chl}) and maiden hair +fern (_Adiantum_) called Ke´-tsi-shah´-te, meaning Blue-jay knees, +because of the slender form and black color. The roots used in the +carrying baskets, baby baskets, and other coarse baskets are of hazel, +called 'Kun. The common black design in ordinary baskets consists +of Spruce roots that have been buried in dark mud and are called +Tah´-che-gut-kle-ah. They are ordinarily used in connection with the +bear grass (_Xerophyllum_). + +_Fragments of Hahwunkwut myths._--Skum, Coyote man, made the world. + +When the sun dropped down the Coon caught it up and it was hot, and +blackened the insides of his hands. + +When the world first floated there was just one big white Redwood tree +called Kus-choo´-ke. A big Eagle was sitting on the tree and was king of +the world. + +The Falcon (Tah´-tes) won the battle for the people. + +_Hahwunkwut foods._--A large variety of foods are eaten: meat +(Ch[=a]´-sun) of elk and deer, both fresh and dried, salmon and +other fish, fresh and dried, marrow, tallow, salmon eggs (usually +smoke-dried), clams of several kinds, mussels, fish milt both dried and +fresh, acorn mush and bread, and a number of roots, berries, and other +parts of plants. Among the food berries are strawberries, blackberries, +salmon-berries, huckleberries, salal berries, elder berries and +manzanita berries. + +Elder berries are mixed with blackberries and steamed in the ground +oven; manzanita berries are mashed and mixed with smoke-dried salmon +eggs. + +Two kinds of kelp are eaten. + +Root masses of the brake fern (_Pteris aquilina_, called Tah´-sohn-ki) +are cooked in the ground oven. They are said to be like milk and have a +fine flavor. + +Salt is not used. + +Wild tobacco is called Yahn-s[)e]^{ch} yah-we and S[)e]^{ch}-yu. The +pipe is straight and is called A-chah. + +_Hahwunkwut plant notes._--The Tree Maple (_Acer macrophyllum_) is +called Ch[=a]´-she. Its inner bark is used for the ordinary everyday +dress for women. + +The Tanbark Oak is the dominant species in the northwest coast region +and its acorns (Sohng´-cheng) are largely eaten by the people. Acorn +meal before leaching is called Rut-ta-gaht. If it is allowed to become +mouldy, the bitter taste disappears so that it does not have to be +leached. Acorn bread cooked on hot ashes is called Ses^{hl}-te. The +ordinary mush is called Ma-guts-kush. + +_Hahwunkwut animal notes._--The Bobcat (_Lynx rufus_) is called +Ne´-ti-us ah´-n[=a]. Its name is never mentioned in the presence of a +baby. If the mother sees one before the baby is born, the baby will have +fits and die. + +The falcon or Duck Hawk (Tah´-tes) was a high personage among the First +People. He won the first battle for the Indians, standing on the first +Redwood Tree. + +The California Condor (T[=a]-long-yi´-chah) is so big and powerful that +he can lift a whale. His name shows this as it is from the name of the +whale (T[=a]´-lah) and means "whale lifter." + +The Dove (Sroo´-e-gun´-sah) cries for his grandmother, especially in the +spring of the year. + +The Purple Finch is called Klah´-nis-me´-tit-le, meaning "many +brothers," because the birds go together in small flocks. + +The Night Heron (Nah-gah´ che yahs´-se) is known as the "sickness bird." + +_Hahwunkwut pits for catching elk and deer._--The Smith River +Hah-wun-kwut used to catch elk and deer in pits, called Song´-kit, dug +in the ground along the runways. These pits differ materially from those +of the Pit River Indians, being much shallower. No effort was made to +make them deep enough to prevent the captured animals from jumping out, +but an ingenious device was used to prevent them from jumping. The pits +were only a little deeper than the length of the legs of the elk, but +poles were placed across the top so that when the animal fell through, +the body would rest on the poles so his feet could not touch the ground. +This of course prevented him from jumping out. + +When "set," the pits were lightly covered with slender sticks and +branches and leaves, to resemble the surrounding ground, but the cover +was so frail that an animal the size of a deer would at once break +through. + +_Smelt fishery._--At Ocean Shore, Smith River, Calif., July 21, 1934. +Vast numbers of smelt, a small surf fish, are caught in nets by the +Hawungkwut Indians. During a "run" at high tide flocks of sea gulls +hover over the incoming fish, thus making their approach known. The +Indians catch them with nets. After a preliminary drying on a circular +mat of brush called the nest, the smelt are transferred to the fish bed, +a long flat rectangular and slightly elevated area built up of sand and +capped with a layer of small smooth stones. On this they are left till +thoroughly dry. + +_Massacres of Huss Indians by the whites._--There were three notable +killings by the whites. + +The first killing took place at Burnt Ranch, three miles south of +the mouth of Smith River, at the rancheria called Yahnk-tah´-kut, +a name perpetuated by the district school house name. Here a large +number of Indians were caught during a ceremonial dance and ruthlessly +slaughtered. The Indians say this was the first killing. + +The second killing was at the rancheria of [=A]´-choo-lik on the big +lagoon known as Lake Earl about three miles north of Crescent City [cf. +Drucker's etculet in Drucker, 1937, map 3]. The Indians were engaged in +gambling at the time. + +The third killing was at the large village of Hah-wun-kwut [Xawun hwut, +Drucker, 1937, map 3] at the mouth of Smith River. + +At the time of the Indian troubles in northwestern California Chief +Ki´-lis (named for Ki-o-lus the Willow tree) was chief of the +Hah´-wun-kwut tribe. + +Three young men of the tribe were active in resenting the aggressions of +the whites and were said to have killed several of the early settlers. +They were very clever and neither the settlers nor the soldiers were +able to capture them. Finally the officer in charge of the troops at +Fort Dick (a log fort on Smith River, about three miles from the present +settlement called Smith River Corners) told Chief Ki´-lis that he would +be hung by the soldiers unless he captured the three young men in +question. + +It happened that the chief had two wives, who were sisters of the three +young men. The chief was in great trouble and called a meeting of his +head men. They said that if the people would contribute enough blood +money (which consists of the long Dentalium shells) they could pay the +two sisters the price necessary to atone for the killing in accordance +with the law of the tribe. The people agreed to this and raised the +necessary money. The nearest male relatives of the young men were chosen +to do the killing, but the young men could not be found. + +One day when one of the chief's wives was getting mussels near the +mouth of Smith River one of the young men appeared and told her that he +and his brothers were hungry and wanted food. She designated a place +on the point of a nearby ridge where she said she would take food, and +it was agreed that the three brothers would come to get it in the late +afternoon or early evening. She then went home and told her husband, +Chief Ki-lis, who in turn notified the nearest relatives of the young +men; they went and concealed themselves near the spot. When the young +men came and were looking for the food their relatives fell upon them +and killed them. They were buried in the same place and the graves may +be seen there to this day. + +The officer in charge of the troops was greatly pleased. He and his +soldiers arranged "a big time," giving the Indians plenty to eat and +also some blankets. This ended the "Indian war" in that region. + +There is a small island called Stun-tahs ahn-kot (50 acres or more in +extent) in the lower part of Smith River, half or three-quarters of a +mile from its mouth. On some of the early maps it bears the name Ta´-les +after the chief. This island the officer gave to the Indians in the name +of the Government, telling them it would always be theirs, and gave the +chief a paper stating that it was given in return for killing the three +outlaw boys. Sometime afterward this paper was burned. + +After the Indians had been driven to the Hoopa Reservation and had +come back, they were not allowed to go to their former rancheria +Hah´-wun-kwut, but were told to go to this island. Later the whites +claimed the island and did not let the Indians have it. + +The present Indian settlement, a mile or two north of the mouth of +Smith River, was purchased for the Indians in or about 1908 by Agent +Kelsey of San Jose, and paid for by the Indian Office from a part of an +appropriation made by Congress for homeless California Indians. It is +occupied at present (1923) by ten or a dozen families. + + +APPENDIX II: NOTES ON UPPER EEL RIVER INDIANS + +By + +A. L. Kroeber + +YUKI "TRIBES" + +The following data were got from Eben Tillotson at Hulls Valley, north +of Round Valley, on July 12, 1938. + +A. Eben said he was a Wi·t'u·knó'm Yuki. This was a "tribe" speaking +a uniform dialect, having uniform customs, but embracing several +"tribelets." Their general territory was along main (or middle) Eel R. +where this runs from E to W, on both sides of it, and S of Round V. They +also owned Oklá·[)c] and Púnki·nipi·[t.] ("wormwood hole"), Poonkiny. +The subdivisions or tribelets were: + + [10.6] 1. U[)s]i·[)c]lAlhótno'm + ("crayfish-creek-large-people") on Salt Cr., S of Middle Eel. + + 2. Olkátno'm, at Henley or Hop ranch in S part of Round V., + where the road enters the flat of the valley. They owned S to the + Middle Eel and down it to Dos Rios confluence. + + 3. Alniuk'í·no'm, at W edge of Round V. + + 4. Ontítno'm, E of Henley ranch in Round V.; also Eden V. to S. + +B. The following were not grouped together by the informant, but agree +in having a southerly range: + + [10.6] 5. LAlkú·tno'm, around Outlet Cr. + + 6. Tí·tAmno'm, eastward, across (S of Middle) Eel R., toward + Sanhedrin Mt., W of the ridge which runs W of Gravelly V. Mountain + people, without villages of size. Dixie Duncan was half of this + group. + + 7. Ki·[)c]ilú·kam is Gravelly V. The Huchnom roamed in that. + +C. East of Hull's V., extending nearly to Hammerhorn Mt., but this was +Nomlaki. + + [10.6] 8. [vS]ipimA´lno'm, on a creek running from W into + (S-flowing) Eel R. + + 9. I·'mptí·tAmno'm, at an opening in the range--i·'mp is a + gap. They were across the Eel, on its E side. + + 10. Pi·lílno'm, beyond (farther E or SE?), at Kumpí·t, "salt + hole," where salt was got, also at Snow Mt. These were Yuki, but + "talked something like" Nomlaki Wintun (who adjoined them, across + the main Coast Range watershed). Their language was about as + different from Yuki as was Huchnom. They were "half Stony Creek" + (along which lived Salt Pomo, then Hill Patwin, then Nomlaki). + + 11. U·k'í·[)c]no'm (added later by informant), in Williams V., + "E" of Hull's V. + + 12. A Yuki group at Twin Rock Cr.--Eben had forgotten their + name. + +D. The real Yuki, centering in Round V., and coming N into the foothills +only about as far as Ebley's Flat. To the N were the Onainó'm, Pitch +Indians, Athabascans, who owned Hull V. ("here") and adjoined the +[vS]ipimAlno'm (no. 8). + + [10.6] 13. Hákno'm, in Round V., around Agency, in the N side + of the valley. + + 14. Ukomnó'm, in middle of the valley. They did not own up + into the mountains. + + 15. At TotimAl, W of Covelo, were a people whose name Eben had + forgotten. + + 16. At NW end of Round V., another group whose name he could + not recall. + +It will be seen that the informant's knowledge was fullest for the part +of Yuki territory S of Round V. + +He thought that all the groups mentioned made the Taikomol and Hulk'ilAl +initiations and performances. + +_Orthography Used_ + + A a mid-raised a, nasalized + [t.] retroflex or palatal t + [vS] sh + [)c] ch + k' etc. glottalized + · long + [-l] surd l, Athabascan only + =ê= ng Athabascan + +[Illustration: Map 18. Yuki "Tribes" according to Eben Tillotson.] + + +ATHABASCAN DATA + +DATA FROM EBEN TILLOTSON + +Onainó'm were the Pitch Indians, a people of the rugged mountains, +adjoining the [vS]ipimA´lno'm Yuki, and with Hull's Valley in their +range. They were "half Yuki and half Wailaki," and spoke both languages. + +The TA´no'm were at Spy Rock on main Eel R. They were also half Yuki and +half Wailaki and bilingual. [But other Yuki cite them as Yuki who also +knew Wailaki.] TAno'm were: Nancy Dobie, Sally Duncan, and Tip. + +These two groups did not make Taikomol or Hulk'ilAl rites [this agrees +with Handbook] but, probably knew about them from having seen them +performed. + +Between the Pitch people and the TAno'm, in the Horse Ranch country, +lived the Ko'il, the Wailaki (proper). Most of the survivors of these +spoke Yuki also. + + +DATA FROM LUCY YOUNG + +The following notes, mainly on Athabascans, were obtained at Round +Valley on July 13, 1938. Lucy Young, the informant, was born on Eel +River at Tseye[)s]ente[-l], opposite Alder Point. Though listed by the +Government as a Wailaki, she is actually what ethnologists call Lassik. +Her father was born 3 mi. from Alder Pt.; her mother, at Soldier Basin, +22 mi. NE. Her mother's first cousin was T'a·su's, known to the whites +as Lassik, from his Wintun name Lasek. He was chief for Alder Pt., +Soldier Basin, (upper) Mad River. Mary Major, informant's contemporary, +is from Soldier Basin and of the same tribe. + +The following were obtained as names of groups of people, though some of +them may be place names. + + Setelbai, "yellow rock," Alder Pt., etc. + + Nal[)s]a, "eat each other," downstream, around Fort Seward. + + Ko[)s]o-ya=ê=, "soaproot eaters," farther downstream and on + Van Duzen R. + + Tena=ê=-keya, Mad R. Indians. + + Kentet[-l]a(=ê=), Kettenchow V., a flat with roots. + + Se[)c]([-l])enden-keya, at Zenia. + + Ka·snol-keya, S of Zenia, called Kikawake in Hayfork [Wintun]. + + Tok'(a)-keya, South Fork of Eel Indians [Sinkyone]. + + Saya=ê=, "lamprey eel eaters," the Spy Rock + + Wailaki [the Ko'il of Tillotson]. + + Djeh-ya=ê=, "pinenut eaters," the Pitch Wailaki, on North Fork + Eel R. + + [The outlook seems to have been chiefly downstream and inland.] + +_Non-Athabascans_ + + [)C]iyin[)c]e, Yuki. + + Baikiha=ê=, Hayfork Wintu. + + Ya=ê=-keya, the Wintu from Weaverville to Redding; their own + name was Poibos. The same name Ya=ê=-keya was applied also to the + Cottonwood Creek Wintun, whom the Lassik met at Yolla Bolly Mt. to + trade salt. [Wintu and Wintun were treated as one language.] + + Yitá·kena, people of lowest Eel R., the Wiyot. + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHY + + +_Abbreviations_ + + AA American Anthropologist + BAE-B Bureau of American Ethnology, Bulletin + SI-MC Smithsonian Institution, Miscellaneous Collections + UC University of California Publications + -AR Anthropological Records + -IA Ibero-Americana + -PAAE American Archaeology and Ethnology + +American Anthropological Association + + 1916. Phonetic Transcription of Indian Languages, Report of + Committee of American Anthropological Association, SI-MC, Vol. 66, + No. 6. + +Barrett, S. A. + + 1908. The Ethno-Geography of the Pomo and Neighboring Indians. + UC-PAAE 6:1-332. + +Bennett, C. A., and N. L. Franklin + + 1954. Statistical Analysis in Chemistry and the Chemical + Industry. John Wiley and Sons, New York. + +Cook, S. F. + + 1943. The Conflict between the California Indian and White + Civilization: I. UC-IA 21, pp. 161-194. + + 1955. The Aboriginal Population of the San Joaquin Valley, + California. UC-AR 16:31-80. + + 1956. The Aboriginal Population of the North Coast of + California. UC-AR 16:81-130. + +Cook, S. F., and A. E. Treganza + + 1950. The Quantitative Investigation of Indian Mounds. UC-PAAE + 40:223-262. + +Curtis, E. S. + + 1924. The North American Indian. Vols. 13, 14. + +Dixon, Roland B. + + 1910. The Chimariko Indians and Language. UC-PAAE 5:293-380. + +Drucker, Philip + + 1937. The Tolowa and Their Southwest Oregon Kin. UC-PAAE + 36:221-300. + +Du Bois, Cora + + 1935. Wintu Ethnography. UC-PAAE 36:1-148. + +Essene, Frank + + 1942. Culture Element Distributions: XXI. Round Valley. UC-AR + 8:1-97. + +Foster, George M. + + 1944. A Summary of Yuki Culture. UC-AR 5:155-244. + +Gifford, E. W. + + 1939. The Coast Yuki. Anthropos, 34:292-375. + +Goddard, Pliny E. + + 1903_a_. Life and Culture of the Hupa. UC-PAAE 1:1-88. + + 1903_b_. Kato Pomo not Pomo. AA 5:375-376. + + 1904. Hupa Texts. UC-PAAE 1:89-377. + + 1907. Lassik. In Handbook of American Indians. BAE-B 30. + + 1909. Kato Texts. UC-PAAE 5:65-238. + + 1914_a_. Notes on the Chilula Indians of Northwestern + California. UC-PAAE 10:265-268. + + 1914_b_. Chilula Texts. UC-PAAE 10:289-379. + + 1923_a_. The Habitat of the Wailaki. UC-PAAE 20:95-109. + + 1923_b_. Wailaki Texts. International Journal of American + Linguistics, II:77-135. + + 1924. Habitat of the Pitch Indians, a Wailaki Division. + UC-PAAE 17:217-225. + + 1929. The Bear River Dialect of Athapascan. UC-PAAE 24:291-324. + +Goldschmidt, Walter + + 1951. Nomlaki Ethnography. UC-PAAE 42:303-443. + +Goldschmidt, W. R., and H. E. Driver + + 1940. The Hupa White Deerskin Dance. UC-PAAE 35:103-142. + +Heizer, R. F., ed. + + 1953. The Archaeology of the Napa Region. UC-AR 12:225-358. + +Heizer, R. F., and M. A. Baumhoff + + 1956. California Settlement Patterns. _In_ Prehistoric + Settlement Patterns in the New World. G. R. Willey, ed. Viking Fund + Publications in Anthropology, No. 23. + +Jepson, W. L. + + 1951. A Manual of the Flowering Plants in California. Univ. + Calif. Press, Berkeley and Los Angeles. + +Kroeber, A. L. + + 1925_a_. Handbook of the Indians of California. BAE-B 78. + + 1925_b_. A Kato War. Festchrift, Publication d'Hommage Offert + au P. W. Schmidt, pp. 394-400. + + 1932. The Patwin and Their Neighbors. UC-PAAE 29:253-423. + + 1939. Cultural and Natural Areas of Native North America. + UC-PAAE, Vol. 38. + +Loud, Llewellyn L. + + 1918. Ethnogeography and Archaeology of the Wiyot Territory. + UC-PAAE 14:221-436. + +Merriam, C. Hart + + 1905. The Indian Population of California. AA 7:594-606. + + 1923. Application of the Athapaskan Term Nung-kahhl. AA + 25:276-277. + + 1928. An-nik-a-del, the History of the Universe. The Stratford + Company, Boston. + + 1930. The New River Indians Tlo-Hom-tah-hoi. AA 32:280-293. + + 1955. Studies of California Indians. Univ. Calif. Press, + Berkeley and Los Angeles. + +Nomland, G. A. + + 1935. Sinkyoni Notes. UC-PAAE 36:149-178. + + 1938. Bear River Ethnography. UC-AR 2:91-124. + +Nomland, G. A., and A. L. Kroeber + + 1936. Wiyot Towns. UC-PAAE 35:39-48. + +Powers, Stephen + + 1877. Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. 3. + Tribes of California. Dept. of Interior, U.S. Geographical and + Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region. + +Rostlund, Erhard + + 1952. Freshwater Fish and Fishing in Native North America. + Univ. Calif. Publ. Geog., Vol. 9. + +Waterman, T. T. + + 1920. Yurok Geography. UC-PAAE 16:177-314. + + + + +PLATES + + +EXPLANATION OF PLATES + + +PLATE 9 + +Map showing the lower Trinity River and locations of Hupa villages. The +map was made by George Gibbs, a member of the expedition of Colonel +Redick McKee in 1852. The village names shown are in the Yurok language. + + +PLATE 10 + +Views of Athabascan territory. _a_. View of Hoopa Valley looking north. +Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1901, UCMA 15-2917. _b_. Big rock on Mad River +at Big Bend "taken from village site" (UCMA catalogue). Big Bend is in +the southern part of Mad River Whilkut territory. There is no record of +the site referred to. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, UCMA 15-3166. _c_. +Fishing place on Van Duzen River between Bridgeville and Old Fort Baker. +Nongatl informant Peter is shown on the rock. This spot is somewhere +among the villages shown on map 7. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, UCMA +15-3156. _d_. Rock on ridge of Snow Camp between Mad River and Redwood +Creek. It is about halfway between Kloki Whilkut village no. 45 and Mad +River Whilkut village no. 15 on map 17. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, +UCMA 15-3165. _e_. Rock on Eel River near Blocksburg in southern Nongatl +territory. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, UCMA 15-3201. _f_. Indian house +at Blocksburg in southern Nongatl territory. Photo by P. E. Goddard, +1903, UCMA 15-3017. + + +PLATE 11 + +Views of Athabascan territory, _a_. Model house (right) and sweathouse +made for Goddard by the Wailaki Captain Jim. Photo by P. E. Goddard, +1906, UCMA 15-3281. _b_. Eel River in Wailaki territory, looking from +the west. The mouth of North Fork Eel River is shown in the lower +right-hand corner. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, UCMA 15-3264. _c_. +Picture taken from the Blue Rock stage road to Cummings. This is the +hinterland of the Eel River Wailaki west of the Eel River. Photo by P. +E. Goddard, 1902, UCMA 15-3011. _d_. A view of Usal, the southernmost +village of the Shelter Cove Sinkyone. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1902, UCMA +15-2922. _e_. A village site near Laytonville in Kato territory. The +village is not known. Photo by P. E. Goddard, 1906, UCMA 15-3146. + +[Illustration: Plate 9. The lower Trinity River, showing the locations +of Hupa villages. Map by George Gibbs, 1852.] + +[Illustration: Plate 10. Athabascan territory.] + +[Illustration: Plate 11. Athabascan territory.] + + * * * * * + + Transcribers Notes: + + Obvious spelling and grammar errors corrected. + + P. 23 capital L in the middle of two Indian words. Proofer + thought typo. However, I believe it was intentional. + + Greek text has been transliterated and enclosed in equal signs. + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's California Athabascan Groups, by Martin A. Baumhoff + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43876 *** |